Carrier Air Conditioner 30RAP010 060 User Manual

30RAP010-060

AQUASNAP^®Air-Cooled Chillers

with COMFORTLINK™ Controls

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting

Page

CONTENTS

System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

START-UP AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,46

Actual Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Check Refrigerant Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Conventions Used in this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Basic Controls Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Current Sensor Board (CSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

AUX Board (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Expansion Valve Board (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Board Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Carrier Comfort Network^®(CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . .19

Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

•

TEMPERATURES

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION

VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS

OPERATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46,47

SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-63

Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

•

CONTROL COMPONENTS

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

•

FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

VALVE REPLACEMENT

VALVE REASSEMBLY

Compressor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

•

COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR

•

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER

REPLACEMENT

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER

CLEANING

COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR

COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS

•

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

•

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT)

DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT)

REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL

LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Oil Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)

Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Check Refrigerant Feed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Energy Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

•

FILTER DRIER

MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES

•

MINUTES LEFT FOR START

MINUTES OFF TIME

LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES

Check Unit Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

•

HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH

PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS

COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

HEATER CABLE

Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Operation of Machine Based on Control Method

and Cooling Set Point Selection Settings. . . . . . . . .32

Cooling Set Point Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Low Sound Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Heating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package. . . . . . .34

Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control . . . .36

Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

WINTER SHUTDOWN

Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Pressure Transducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chilled Water Flow Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Condenser Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Motormaster^®V Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

•

GENERAL OPERATION

CONFIGURATION

DRIVE PROGRAMMING

EPM CHIP

LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS

REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES

•

DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled)

EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT

(4 to 20 mA Controlled)

Hydronic Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64

Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)

Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-73

•

DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled)

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Digital Scroll Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

•

DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION

DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION

PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,45

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg 1 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control System for 30RAP units. The display has up and down

arrow keys, an key, and an key. These

GENERAL

ESCAPE

keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the

display structure. Press the key until the highest

ENTER

This publication contains Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting information for the 30RAP

AquaSnap^®air-cooled chillers. See Table 1. These chillers are

equipped with ComfortLink™ controls and electronic expan-

sion valves (EXVs).

ESCAPE

operating level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode

levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See

Fig. 1 and Tables 2-14.

WARNING

Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the

ENTER

keys simultaneously will put the scrolling

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control

system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out or

bypass components or otherwise depart from recom-

mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control

board or accompanying wiring may destroy the board or

electrical component.

and

ESCAPE

marquee display into expanded text mode where the full mean-

ing of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed

for the current selection. Press the

and

ESCAPE

ENTER

keys to return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu

of rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW).

In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be

entered again before changes can be made to password protect-

Table 1 — Unit Sizes

UNIT

NOMINAL CAPACITY (TONS)

30RAP010

30RAP015

30RAP018

30RAP020

30RAP025

30RAP030

30RAP035

30RAP040

30RAP045

30RAP050

30RAP055

30RAP060

ed items. Press the

text mode.

key to exit out of the expanded

ESCAPE

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration

DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display

expansions will immediately change to the new language. No

power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring

languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name alternates

with the value. Press the

ENTER

and the value will be displayed. Press

key at a changeable item

again and the

ENTER

value will begin to flash indicating that the value can be

changed. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value,

Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-

ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the

local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory)

will be used in this manual.

and confirm the value by pressing the

key.

ENTER

Point names will be written with the mode name first, then

any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an

arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold

and italics. As an example, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point,

which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode,

would be written as Configuration OPTNLLCS.

MODE

Run Status

Service Test

Temperature

Pressures

Setpoints

Alarm Status

Inputs

Outputs

This path name will show the user how to navigate through

the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user

would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the

Configuration

Time Clock

Operating Modes

Alarms

ESCAPE ENTER

and

keys. The arrow symbol in the path name repre-

to move into the next level of the

Fig. 1 — Scrolling Marquee Display

sents pressing

menu structure.

ENTER

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in

the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be

shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the

value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will

be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example,

ConfigurationOPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads).

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to

ENTER

change the value or state and press the

key to accept

ENTER

key to return to the next higher level of

it. Press the

ESCAPE

structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Pressing the

and

keys simultaneously

ESCAPE

ENTER

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass-

word protected. The words ‘PASS’ and ‘WORD’ will alternate

on the display when required. The default password is 0111.

will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or

value across the display. The expanded description is shown in

the local display tables but will not be shown with the path

names in text.

The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network^®) point names are also

referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the

unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN

tables are located in Appendix B of the manual.

Press

ENTER

and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press

ENTER

again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the

arrow keys to change the number and press

to accept

ENTER

the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password.

The password can only be changed through CCN operator in-

terface software such as ComfortWORKS^®, ComfortVIEW™

and Service Tool.

Basic Controls Usage

SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — The scrolling mar-

quee display is the standard interface display to the ComfortLink

See Tables 2-14 and Appendix A for further details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE —

The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the

ComfortLink™ control system, which is only available as a

the Navigator module, press the

play reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move

to the Configuration mode. Press

this mode. The display will read:

key until the dis-

ESCAPE

to obtain access to

ENTER

field-installed accessory. The display has up and down arrow

keys, an

key, and an

key. These keys are

ESCAPE

used to navigate through the different levels of the display

structure. Press the key until ‘Select a Menu Item’

ENTER

> TEST OFF

METR OFF

LANG ENGLISH

ESCAPE

is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated

by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 2.

Pressing

will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

ENTER

or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing

ENTER

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view

screen. Pressing and simultaneously

Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the cur-

rently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the

ESCAPE

ENTER

and

keys simultaneously will put the Nav-

ESCAPE

ENTER

allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or

down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s contrast will

change with the adjustment. Press

change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as

it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

igator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning

of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Press-

to accept the

ENTER

ing the

and

keys when the display says

ESCAPE

ENTER

‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator

module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items

in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the password will be dis-

abled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be

Adjusting the Backlight Brightness — The backlight of the

display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory

default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the

made to password protected items. Press the

exit out of the expanded text mode.

key to

ESCAPE

Navigator module, press the

key until the display

ESCAPE

reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration

DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display

expansions will immediately change to the new language. No

power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring

languages.

Configuration mode. Press

mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF

to obtain access to this

ENTER

METR OFF

LANG ENGLISH

will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the

left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the

display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the

Pressing

ENTER

or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the

ENTER

display. Press the

key at a changeable item and the val-

ENTER

ue will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change

the value, and confirm the value by pressing the key.

view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultane-

ously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Use the

up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press

to accept the change. The Navigator module will

keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

ENTER

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in

the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

ENTER

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to

ENTER

change the value or state and press the

key to accept

ENTER

key to return to the next higher level of

Comf

it. Press the

ESCAPE

Link

structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass-

word protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed

when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default

password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change the number

MODE

Alar

Run Status

Status

Ser

vice

per

atur

Pressure

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configur

ation

Cloc

Tim

and press

to enter the digit. Continue with the re-

ESC

ENTER

Oper

ating Modes

Alar

maining digits of the password. The password can only be

changed through CCN operator interface software such as

ComfortWORKS, ComfortVIEW and Service Tool.

ENTER

Adjusting the Contrast — The contrast of the display can be

adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of

Fig. 2 — Accessory Navigator™ Display Module

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2 — Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure*

RUN

STATUS

SERVICE

TEST

SET

POINTS

TIME

CLOCK

OPERATING

MODES

MODE

TEMPERATURES PRESSURES

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION

ALARMS

Auto

View of

Run Status

(VIEW)

Service

Test Mode

(TEST)

Ent and Leave Unit

Temps

Pressures

Ckt A

(PRC.A)

Cooling

Setpoints

(COOL)

General

Inputs

(GEN.I)

General

Outputs

(GEN.O)

Display

Configuration

(DISP)

Time of

Day

(TIME)

Modes

(MODE)

Current

(CRNT)

(UNIT)

Unit Run

Hour and

Start

Head

Outputs

Circuit A

EXV

Month,

Date, Day,

and Year

(DATE)

Outputs

and Pumps

(OUTS)

Temperatures

Ckt A

(CIR.A)

Pressures

Ckt B

(PRC.B)

Circuit

Inputs

(CRCT)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Reset

Alarms

(RCRN)

Pressure

Setpoint

(HEAD)

(RUN)

(A.EXV)

Brine

Freeze

Setpoint

(FRZ)

Outputs

Circuit B

EXV

Daylight

Savings

Time

Compressor Ciruit A Comp

Temperatures

Ckt B

(CIR.B)

4-20mA

Inputs

(4-20)

Unit Options 1

Hardware

(OPT1)

Alarm

History

(HIST)

Run Hours

(HOUR)

Test

(CMPA)

(B.EXV)

(DST)

Local

Holiday

Schedules

(HOL.L)

Compressor Ciruit B Comp

Outputs

Circuit A

(CIR.A)

Unit Options 2

Controls

(OPT2)

Starts

Test

(STRT)

(CMPB)

Local

Occu-

Preventive

Maintenance

(PM)

Outputs

Circuit B

(CIR.B)

CCN Network

Configuration

(CCN)

pancy

Schedule

(SCH.L)

Software

Version

(VERS)

Head Pressure

Comp. Delta

(HP.A)

Head Pressure

Comp. Delta

(HP.B)

Schedule

Override

(OVR)

SUB-MODE

Cir. A EXV

Configuration

(EXV.A)

Cir. B EXV

Configuration

(EXV.B)

Motormaster

Configuration

(MM)

Reset Cool Temp

(RSET)

Set Point and

Ramp Load

(SLCT)

Service

Configuration

(SERV)

Broadcast

Configuration

(BCST)

LEGEND

Ckt — Circuit

*Throughout this text, the location of items in the menu structure will be

described in the following format:

^{Item Expansion (Mode Name}Sub-mode NameITEM)

For example, using the language selection item:

^{Language Selection (Configuration}DISPLANG)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

EXPANSION

SUB-MODE

VIEW

ITEM

EWT

LWT

COMMENT

ENTER

XXX.X F

ENTERING FLUID TEMP

LEAVING FLUID TEMP

ACTIVE SETPOINT

CONTROL POINT

XXX.X F

SETP XXX.X F

CTPT XXX.X F

LOD.F

STAT

XXX

LOAD/UNLOAD FACTOR

CONTROL MODE

0 = Service Test

1 = Off Local

2 = Off CCN

3 = Off Time

4 = Off Emrgcy

5 = On Local

6 = On CCN

7 = On Time

8 = Ht Enabled

9 = Pump Delay

LD.PM

OCC

LEAD PUMP

OCCUPIED

YES/NO

LS.AC

LOW SOUND ACTIVE

OVERRIDE MODES IN EFFECT

PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY

REQUESTED STAGE

CURRENT ALARMS & ALERTS

TIME OF DAY

MODE YES/NO

CAP

STGE

ALRM

TIME

XXX %

XXX

XX.XX

00.00-23.59

1 = January, 2 = February, etc.

01-31

MNTH

DATE

YEAR

MONTH OF YEAR

DAY OF MONTH

YEAR OF CENTURY

MACHINE OPERATING HOURS

MACHINE STARTS

RUN

ENTER

HRS.U XXXX HRS

STR.U

HR.P1

HR.P2

XXXX

XXXX.X

PUMP 1 RUN HOURS

PUMP 2 RUN HOURS

CIRCUIT A RUN HOURS

HOUR

ENTER

HRS.A XXXX HRS

HRS.B XXXX HRS

HR.A1 XXXX HRS

HR.A2 XXXX HRS

HR.B1 XXXX HRS

HR.B2 XXXX HRS

CIRCUIT B RUN HOURS

See Note

COMPRESSOR A1 RUN HOURS

COMPRESSOR A2 RUN HOURS

COMPRESSOR B1 RUN HOURS

COMPRESSOR B2 RUN HOURS

COMPRESSOR A1 STARTS

COMPRESSOR A2 STARTS

COMPRESSOR B1 STARTS

COMPRESSOR B2 STARTS

PUMP MAINTENANCE

See Note

STRT

ENTER

ST.A1

ST.A2

ST.B1

ST.B2

PUMP

XXXX

See Note

ENTER

SI.PM

P.1.DN

P.2.DN

P.1.MN

P.2.MN

XXXX HRS

YES/NO

PUMP SERVICE INTERVAL

PUMP 1 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

PUMP 2 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

PUMP 1 MAINTENANCE DONE

PUMP 2 MAINTENANCE DONE

Default: 8760

User Entry

YES/NO

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY

EXPANSION

SUB-MODE

PM (cont)

ITEM

COMMENT

PMDT

PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES

ENTER

P.1.M0

P.1.M1

P.1.M2

P.1.M3

P.1.M4

P.2.M0

P.2.M1

P.2.M2

P.2.M3

P.2.M4

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

ENTER

STRN

STRAINER MAINTENANCE

STRAINER SRVC INTERVAL

STRAINER SRVC COUNTDOWN

STRAINER MAINT. DONE

STRAINER MAINT. DATES

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

SI.ST

S.T.DN

S.T.MN

ST.DT

XXXX HRS

YES/NO

Default: 8760

User Entry

ENTER

S.T.M0

S.T.M1

S.T.M2

S.T.M3

S.T.M4

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

ENTER

COIL

COIL MAINTENANCE

COIL SRVC INTER

SI.CL

C.L.DN

C.L.MN

CL.DT

XXXX HRS

YES/NO

Default: 8760

User Entry

COIL SERVICE COUNTDOWN

COIL MAINT. DONE

COIL MAINTENANCE DATES

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

ENTER

C.L.M0

C.L.M1

C.L.M2

C.L.M3

C.L.M4

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

VERS

ENTER

MBB

EXV

CESR131460-xx-xx

xx-xx is Version number*

CESR131172-xx-xx

AUX1

EMM

MARQ

NAVI

CESR131333-xx-xx

CESR131174-xx-xx

CESR131171-xx-xx

CESR130227-xx-xx

*Press

ENTER

and

ESCAPE

simultaneously to obtain version number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4 — Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

TEST

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

ON/OFF

SERVICE TEST MODE

To Enable Service Test Mode,

move Enable/Off/Remote

Contact switch to OFF. Change

TEST to ON. Move switch to

ENABLE.

ENTER

OUTS

OUTPUTS AND PUMPS

EXV A % OPEN

ENTER

EXV.A

EXV.B

FAN1

FAN2

FAN3

FAN4

FAN5

FAN6

V.HPA

V.HPB

CLP.1

CLP.2

UL.TM

CL.HT

RMT.A

0 to 100%

ON/OFF

0 to 100%

ON/OFF

0 to 15

EXV B % OPEN

FAN 1 RELAY

FAN 2 RELAY

FAN 3 RELAY

FAN 4 RELAY

FAN 5 RELAY

FAN 6 RELAY

VAR HEAD PRESS %

COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY

COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY

COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

COOLER/PUMP HEATER

REMOTE ALARM RELAY

ON/OFF

CMPA

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

ENTER

CC.A1

UL.TM

CC.A2

CC.A3

CC.A4

MLV

ON/OFF

0 to 15

COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

ON/OFF

CMPB

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST

COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

See Note

ENTER

CC.B1

CC.B2

CC.B3

CC.B4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5 — Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

UNIT

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS

ENTER

CEWT

CLWT

OAT

XXX.X F

COOLER ENTERING FLUID

COOLER LEAVING FLUID

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

SPACE TEMPERATURE

SPT

DLWT

LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID

CIR.A

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A

SCT.A

SST.A

RGT.A

D.GAS

SH.A

XXX.X F

XXX.X ^F

SATURATED CONDENSING TMP

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP

COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP

DISCHARGE GAS TEMP

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

CIR.B

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B

See Note

SCT.B

SST.B

RGT.B

SH.B

XXX.X F

XXX.X ^F

SATURATED CONDENSING TMP

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP

COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

See Note

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 6 — Pressure Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

PRC.A

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

PRESSURES CIRCUIT A

ENTER

DP.A

SP.A

XXX.X PSIG

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

SUCTION PRESSURE

PRC.B

PRESSURES CIRCUIT B

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

See Note

ENTER

DP.B

SP.B

XXX.X PSIG

SUCTION PRESSURE

See Note

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 7 — Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

COOL

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

COOLING SETPOINTS

ENTER

CSP.1

CSP.2

CSP.3

XXX.X F

COOLING SETPOINT 1

Default: 44 F

Default: 32 F

COOLING SETPOINT 2

ICE SETPOINT

HEAD

HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS

HEAD SETPOINT

ENTER

H.DP

F. ON

XXX.X F

Default: 95 F

Default: 72 F

Default: 23 F

Default: 15 F

FAN ON SETPOINT

FAN OFF SETPOINT

F.OFF

B.OFF

F.DLT

BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP

FAN STAGE DELTA

FRZ

BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT

BRINE FREEZE POINT

ENTER

BR.FZ

XXX.X F

Default: 34 F

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 8 — Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

GEN.I

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

GENERAL INPUTS

ENTER

STST

FLOW

PM.F.1

PM.F.2

HT.RQ

DLS1

STRT/STOP

ON/OFF

START/STOP SWITCH

COOLER FLOW SWITCH

COOLER PUMP 1 INTERLOCK

COOLER PUMP 2 INTERLOCK

HEAT REQUEST

OPEN/CLSE

ON/OFF

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

ICE DONE

DLS2

ON/OFF

ICED

ON/OFF

DUAL

ON/OFF

DUAL SETPOINT SWITCH

CRCT

CIRCUITS INPUTS

ENTER

FKA1

FKA2

FKA3

FKA4

FKB1

FKB2

FKB3

FKB4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A1 FEEDBACK

COMPRESSOR A2 FEEDBACK

COMPRESSOR A3 FEEDBACK

COMPRESSOR A4 FEEDBACK

COMPRESSOR B1 FEEDBACK

COMPRESSOR B2 FEEDBACK

COMPRESSOR B3 FEEDBACK

COMPRESSOR B4 FEEDBACK

See Note

4-20

4-20 MA INPUTS

ENTER

DMND

RSET

CSP

XX.X MA

4-20 MA DEMAND SIGNAL

4-20 MA RESET SIGNAL

4-20 MA COOLING SETPOINT

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

GEN.O

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

GENERAL OUTPUTS

ENTER

FAN1

FAN2

FAN3

FAN4

FAN5

FAN6

V.HPA

V.HPB

C.WP1

C.WP2

CLHT

MLV.R

ON/OFF

FAN 1 RELAY

FAN 2 RELAY

FAN 3 RELAY

FAN 4 RELAY

FAN 5 RELAY

FAN 6 RELAY

FAN SPEED CIRCUIT A

FAN SPEED CIRCUIT B

COOLER PUMP RELAY 1

COOLER PUMP RELAY 2

COOLER/PUMP HEATER

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

A.EXV

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

ENTER

EXV.A

APPR

AP.SP

X.SH.R

S.SH.R

SH_R

0 to 100%

ON/OFF

EXV % OPEN

CIRCUIT A APPROACH

APPROACH SETPOINT

SH RESET AT MAX UNL-DIG

DIGLOAD TO START SH RST

AMOUNT OF SH RESET

EXVA OVERRIDE

OVR.A

SPH.A

ASH.S

AMP.S

PLM.A

SPR.1

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

ACTIVE MOP SETPT

CIR A EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPARE 1 TEMPERATURE

B.EXV

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B EXV

EXV % OPEN

ENTER

EXV.B

APPR

AP.SP

OVR.B

SPH.B

ASH.S

AMP.S

PLM.B

SPR.2

0 to 100%

ON/OFF

CIRCUIT B APPROACH

APPROACH SETPOINT

EXVB OVERRIDE

SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

ACTIVE MOP SETPT

CIR B EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPARE 2 TEMPERATURE

CIR.A

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A

ENTER

CC.A1

DPE.R

CC.A2

CC.A3

CC.A4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

COMP A1 LOAD PERCENT

COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

CIR.B

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B (See Note)

ENTER

CC.B1

CC.B2

CC.B3

CC.B4

ON/OFF

COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

DISP

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

ENTER

TEST

ON/OFF

TEST DISPLAY LEDS

METR

LANG

ON/OFF

METRIC DISPLAY

Off = English; On = Metric

Default: 0

0 = English

LANGUAGE SELECTION

1 = Espanol

2 = Francais

3 = Portuguese

PAS.E

PASS

ENBL/DSBL

xxxx

PASSWORD ENABLE

SERVICE PASSWORD

Default: Enable

Default: 1111

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

UNIT

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

ENTER

UNIT CONFIGURATION

SIZE

SZA.1

SZA.2

SZA.3

SZA.4

SZB.1

SZB.2

SZB.3

SZB.4

SH.SP

FAN.S

UNIT SIZE

COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE

Unit Dependent

Default: 9 F

COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE

COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE

COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE

SUPERHEAT SETPOINT

NUMBER OF FANS

XX.X F

1 = One Fan

2 = Two Fans

3 = Three Fans

4 = Four Fans

Default: Yes

EXV

YES/NO

EXV MODULE INSTALLED?

COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL?

Default: No

Yes = A1 Compressor is Digital

Scroll

A1.TY

Default: 7

Max 12 010,015

Max 10 018-060

MAX.T

0 to 12

MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

COOLER FLUID

OPT1

Default: Water

1 = Water

2 = Medium Temperature

Brine

ENTER

FLUD

MLV.S

D.G.EN

CSB.E

CPC

YES/NO

ENBL/DSBL

ON/OFF

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT

DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE

CSB BOARDS ENABLE

Default: No

Default: Off

Default: No

COOLER PUMP CONTROL

COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE

COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE

PM1E

PM2E

YES/NO

PM.P.S

PM.SL

YES/NO

COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT

COOLER PUMP SELECT

Default: Automatic

0 = Automatic

1 = Pump 1 Starts first

2 = Pump 2 Starts first

0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1

min.

PM.DY

XX MIN

COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY

PM.DT

ROT.P

EMM

XXXX HRS

YES/NO

PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS

ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW

EMM MODULE INSTALLED

Default: 500 hours

User Entry

YES/NO

0 = RTPF

1 = MCHX Default MCHX

CND.T

0,1

COND HX

MOPS

APPR

EXV MOP SET POINT

Range: 40 - 80 Default: 50

Range: 5 - 40 Default: 9.0

CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

KEYPAD

ITEM

SUB-MODE

OPT2

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

ENTRY

EXPANSION

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CONTROL METHOD

CTRL

Default: Switch

ENTER

0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch

2 = Occupancy

3 = CCN Control

LOAD

LLCS

LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT

LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT

Default: Equal

1 = Equal

2 = Staged

Default: Automatic

1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

Default: 60

LCWT

DELY

XX.X F

HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT

MINUTES OFF TIME

Range: 2 to 60 F

Default: 0 Minutes

Range: 0 to 15 Minutes

ENBL/DSBL

ICE.M

LS.MD

ICE MODE ENABLE

Default: Disable

LOW SOUND MODE SELECT

Default: 0

0 = Mode Disable

1 = Fan Noise Only

2 = Fan/Compressor Noise

LS.ST

LS.ND

LS.LT

00:00

LOW SOUND START TIME

LOW SOUND END TIME

Default: 00:00

Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100%

XXX %

LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT

CCN

CCN NETWORK CONFIGURATION

CCN ADDRESS

Default: 1

Range: 1 to 239

CCNA

XXX

ENTER

Default: 0

CCNB

BAUD

XXX

CCN BUS NUMBER

CCN BAUD RATE

Range: 0 to 239

Default: 9600

1 = 2400

2 = 4800

3 = 9600

4 = 19,200

5 = 38,400

HP.A

HP.B

HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1

ENTER

A1.DT

A2.DT

Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2

HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1

ENTER

B1.DT

B2.DT

Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

EXV.A

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

ENTER

STR.A

MIN.A

RNG.A

SPD.A

POF.A

MIN.A

MAX.A

OVR.A

TYP.A

H.SCT

X.PCT

X.PER

A.PCT

M.PCT

S.PCT

DELY

XXX

EXV CIRC.A START POS

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 30

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 200

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION

EXVA STEPS IN RANGE

EXVA STEPS PER SECOND

EXVA FAIL POSITION IN %

EXVA MINIMUM STEPS

XXXXX

XXX

XXXXX

XXX

EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS

EXVA OVERRUN STEPS

EXVA STEPPER TYPE

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1

0,1

XXX

HIGH SCT THRESHOLD

OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP

MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL

PRE-OPEN EXV - FAN ADDING

PRE-CLOSE EXV - FAN SUB

PRE-CLOSE EXV - LAG SHUT

LAG START DELAY

Range: 50 - 140 Default: 115

Range: 0 - 30 Default: 10

Range: 0 - 30 Default: 5

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

XXX

EXV.B

CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION

EXV CIRC.B START POS

ENTER

STR.B

MIN.B

RNG.B

SPD.B

POF.B

MIN.B

MAX.B

OVR.B

TYP.B

XXX

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 50

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 200

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

EXV CIRC.B MIN POSITION

EXVB STEPS IN RANGE

EXVB STEPS PER SECOND

EXVB FAIL POSITION IN %

EXVB MINIMUM STEPS

EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS

EXVB OVERRUN STEPS

EXVB STEPPER TYPE

XXXXX

XXX

XXXXX

XXX

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1

0,1

MOTORMASTER CONFIGURATION

MOTORMASTER SELECT

ENTER

MMR.S

P.GAN

I.GAN

D.GAN

MIN.S

YES/NO

HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN

HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN

HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN

MINIMUM FAN SPEED

Range: -20 - 20 Default: 1.0

Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.1

Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.0

Range: 0 - 100 Default: 5.0

XXX

* Sizes 010-020 and 035-045, default is 1596. Sizes 025,030, and 050-060, default is 2500.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

RSET

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

RESET COOL TEMP

COOLING RESET TYPE

CRST

Default: No Reset

0 = No Reset

ENTER

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input

2 = Outdoor Air Temperature

3 = Return Fluid

4 = Space Temperature

Default: 0.0F

MA.DG

RM.NO

RM.F

XX.X F

XXX.X F

XX.X F

4-20 - DEGREES RESET

REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP

REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP

REMOTE - DEGREES RESET

RETURN - NO RESET TEMP

RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP

Range: –30 to 30F

Default: 125F (51.7C)

Range: 0° to 125F

Default: 0.0F (-17.8C)

Range: 0 to 125F

Default: 0.0F

Range: –30 to 30F

RM.DG

RT.NO

RT.F

Default: 10.0F (5.6C)

Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

XXX.X F

Default: 0.0F (0.0C)

Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

Default: 0.0F

RT.DG

DMDC

XX.X F

RETURN - DEGREES RESET

DEMAND LIMIT SELECT

Range: –30 to 30F (–34.4 to -1.1 C)

Default: None

0 = None

1 = Switch

2 = 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = CCN Loadshed

Default: 100%

DM20

SHNM

SHDL

SHTM

DLS1

DLS2

LLEN

MSSL

SLVA

XXX %

XXX

DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA

LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER

LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA

MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

MASTER/SLAVE SELECT

SLAVE ADDRESS

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 0

Range: 0 to 99

Default: 0%

Range: 0 to 60%

XXX %

XXX

Default: 60 minutes

Range: 0 to 120 minutes

Default: 80%

Range: 0 to 100%

XXX %

ENBL/DSBL

SLVE/MAST

XXX

Default: 50%

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: Disable

Default: Master

Default: 0

Range: 0 to 239

ENTER

Default: Master Leads

0 = Master Leads

1 = Slave Leads

2 = Automatic

LLBL

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

Default: 168 hours

LLBD

LLDY

PARA

XXX

YES

LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LAG START DELAY

Range: 40 to 400 hours

Default: 5 minutes

Range: 0 to 30 minutes

PARALLEL CONFIGURATION

Default: YES (CANNOT BE CHANGED)

SLCT

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

CLSP

Default: Single

0 = Single

1 = Dual Switch

2 = Dual CCN Occupied

3 = 4 to 20 mA Input (requires

EMM)

ENTER

RL.S

CRMP

SCHD

Z.GN

ENBL/DSBL

RAMP LOAD SELECT

COOLING RAMP LOADING

SCHEDULE NUMBER

Default: Enable

Default: 1.0

Range: 0.2 to 2.0

X.X

Default: 1

Range: 1 to 99

Default: 1.0

Range: 1.0 to 4.0

X.X

DEADBAND MULTIPLIER

SERV

SERVICE CONFIGURATION

ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1

ENTER

EN.A1

EN.A2

EN.B1

EN.B2

ENBL/DSBL

Unit dependent

ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2

ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1

ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

BCST

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

ENTER

T.D.BC

OAT.B

ON/OFF

CCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST

CCN OAT BROADCAST

G.S.BC

BC.AK

GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST

CCN BROADCAST ACK’ER

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

TIME

ITEM

DISPLAY

SUB-ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

TIME OF DAY

ENTER

HH.MM

XX.XX

HOUR AND MINUTE

Military (00:00 – 23:59)

DATE

MONTH,DATE,DAY AND YEAR

MONTH OF YEAR

ENTER

MNTH

DOM

DAY

1-12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc)

Range: 01-31

DAY OF MONTH

DAY OF WEEK

1-7 (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, etc)

YEAR

XXXX

YEAR OF CENTURY

DST

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

MONTH

ENTER

STR.M

STR.W

STR.D

MIN.A

STP.M

STP.W

STP.D

MIN.S

Default: 4, Range 1 – 12

Default: 1, Range 1 – 5

Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

Default: 10, Range 1 – 12

Default: 5, Range 1 – 5

Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

WEEK

DAY

MINUTES TO ADD

MONTH

WEEK

DAY

MINUTES TO SUBTRACT

HOL.L

LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES

HOLIDAY START MONTH

HD.01 through HD.30

Range 0 – 12

ENTER

MON

DAY

LEN

START DAY

Range 0 – 31

DURATION (DAYS)

Range 0 - 99

SCH.N

SCH.L

SCHEDULE NUMBER

Default: 1, Range 1 – 99

LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

ENTER

PER.1

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1*

PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME

PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME

MONDAY IN PERIOD

OCC.1

UNC.1

MON.1

TUE.1

WED.1

THU.1

FRI.1

XX:XX

XX.XX

Military (00:00 – 23:59)

YES/NO

TUESDAY IN PERIOD

WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD

THURSDAY IN PERIOD

FRIDAY IN PERIOD

SAT.1

SATURDAY IN PERIOD

SUNDAY IN PERIOD

SUN.1

HOL.1

HOLIDAY IN PERIOD

* Repeats for Occupancy Periods 2 through 8.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

OVR

ITEM

DISPLAY

SUB-ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

SCHEDULE OVERRIDE

ENTER

OVR.T

OVR.L

T.OVR

TIMED OVERRIDE HOURS

OVERRIDE TIME LIMIT

TIMED OVERRIDE

Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours

User Entry

YES/NO

Table 12 — Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

ENTER

MD01

MD02

MD03

MD05

MD06

MD07

MD08

MD09

MD10

MD13

MD14

MD15

MD16

MD17

MD18

MD19

MD20

MD21

MD22

MD23

MD24

MD25

ON/OFF

CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

RAMP LOAD LIMITED

TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB

SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE

MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE

DUAL SETPOINT

TEMPERATURE RESET

DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED

COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION

LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING

HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING

MAKING ICE

STORING ICE

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B

MINIMUM COMP ON TIME

PUMP OFF DELAY TIME

LOW SOUND MODE

LEGEND

CSM

SCT

WSM

—

Chillervisor System Manager

Saturated Condensing Temperature

Water System Manager

Table 13 — Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

CRNT

ITEM

COMMENT

EXPANSION

Alarms are shown as AXXX.

Alerts are shown as TXXX.

ENTER

AXXX OR TXXX

YES/NO

CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS

RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS

ALARM HISTORY

RCRN

HIST

Alarms are shown as AXXX.

Alerts are shown as TXXX.

AXXX OR TXXX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 14 — Operating Modes

MODE

NO.

ITEM EXPANSION

DESCRIPTION

CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

RAMP LOAD LIMITED

Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) is controlling the chiller.

Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller.

Dual Chiller control is enabled.

Rampload(pull-down)limitingineffect.Inthismode,therateatwhichleavingfluidtemperature

isdroppedislimitedtoapredeterminedvaluetopreventcompressoroverloading.SeeCooling

Ramp Loading (ConfigurationSLCTCRMP). The pull-down limit can be modified, if

desired, to any rate from 0.2° F to 2° F (0.1° to 1° C)/minute.

TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA

Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed

schedule, forcing unit to Occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit under

Local (Enable) or CCN (Carrier Comfort Network^®) control. Override expires after each use.

Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-

urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If

the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ

BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F

(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the satu-

rated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for

90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to

decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB

SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE

Circuit B cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-

urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If

the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ

BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F

(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the satu-

rated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for

90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to

decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving

towards the control point.

MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE

DUAL SETPOINT

Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (ConfigurationOPT2DELY).

Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOL

CSP.1) during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2)

during unoccupied periods.

TEMPERATURE RESET

Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leav-

ing fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point

can be modified based on return fluid, outdoor-air-temperature, space temperature, or 4 to

20 mA signal.

DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED

Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by

demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the chiller may not be able to pro-

duce the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs

or a 4 to 20 mA signal.

COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION

LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING

HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING

Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section

for definition). The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the

Freeze point.

Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and

decreasing faster than -0.5° F per minute. Error between leaving fluid and control point

exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary.

Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing.

Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically

load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load.

MAKING ICE

STORING ICE

Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (Set PointsCOOL

CSP.3) to make ice. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open.

ChillerisinanunoccupiedmodeandiscontrollingtoCoolingSetPoint2(SetPointsCOOL

CSP.2). The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed.

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A

Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than

the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity

may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con-

densing temperature.

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B

Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than

the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity

may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con-

densing temperature.

MINIMUM COMP ON TIME

PUMP OFF DELAY TIME

LOW SOUND MODE

Cooling load may be satisfied, however control continues to operate compressor to ensure

proper oil return. May be an indication of oversized application, low fluid flow rate or low loop

volume.

Cooling load is satisfied, however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set

by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1

PM.DY).

Chiller operates at higher condensing temperature and/or reduced capacity to minimize

overall unit noise during evening/night hours (ConfigurationOPT2LS.MD).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

set to ‘On’ for these boards. The auxiliary board (AUX) has an

8-position DIP switch. Switches 2, 5, and 7 are set to ‘On.’

CONTROLS

General — The 30RAP air-cooled scroll chillers contain

the ComfortLink™ electronic control system that controls and

monitors all operations of the chiller.

The control system is composed of several components as

listed in the sections below. See Fig. 3-5 for typical control box

drawings. See Fig. 6 and 7 for control schematics.

Control Module Communication

RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be

visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs

(light-emitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status

LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every

2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify

that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that

the main base board (MBB) is supplied with the current soft-

ware. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still

persists, replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or

blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the

board should be replaced.

GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local

Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking

whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED

which should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN

connections for potential communication errors at the board J3

and/or J4 connectors. Communication between modules is

accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in

parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB

provides both power and communication directly to the

marquee display only.

Main Base Board (MBB) — See Fig. 8. The MBB is

the heart of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the

major portion of operating software and controls the operation

of the machine. The MBB continuously monitors input/output

channel information received from its inputs and from all other

modules. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and

suction pressure transducers and thermistors. See Table 15. The

MBB also receives the feedback inputs from each compressor

current sensor board and other status switches. See Table 16.

The MBB also controls several outputs. Relay outputs con-

trolled by the MBB are shown in Table 17. Information is

transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus

or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The CCN (Carrier Com-

fort Network) bus is also supported. Connections to both LEN

and CCN buses are made at the LVT (low voltage terminal).

See Fig. 8.

Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM

module is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-

installed accessory. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 mA

inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set point

and demand limit functions. The EMM module also receives

the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit

and ice done functions. The EMM module communicates the

status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the

control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to

the inputs received.

YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times

of network communication.

Carrier Comfort Network^®(CCN) Interface —

The 30RAP chiller units can be connected to the CCN if

desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded,

3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed

in the field. See Table 18. The system elements are connected

to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The

positive pin of each system element communication connector

must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on

either side of it. This is also required for the negative and

signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections

for CCN should be made at LVT. Consult the CCN Contrac-

tor’s Manual for further information.

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (Ameri-

can Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual

conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl,

Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil

shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl,

or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of

–20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413

or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia

(02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.

It is important when connecting to a CCN communication

bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network

to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used

for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white

for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables contain-

ing different colored wires.

At each system element, the shields of its communication

bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is

entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield

must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the commu-

nication bus cable exits from one building and enters another,

the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning

suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the

building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to

the network:

Current Sensor Board (CSB) — The CSB is used to

monitor the status of the compressors by measuring current and

providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB) or

compressor expansion module (CXB).

AUX Board (AUX) — The AUX is used with the digital

scroll option and the low ambient head pressure option. It pro-

vides additional inputs and outputs for digital scroll control

along with analog outputs to control head pressure control fan

speeds.

Expansion Valve Board (EXV) — The EXV board

communicates with the MBB and directly controls the expan-

sion valves to maintain the correct compressor superheat.

Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch — The Enable/

Off/Remote Contact switch is a 3-position switch used to

control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position the

chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off

position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the

Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can

be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of

handling a 24 vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote

Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to

operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN

configuration and set point data. See Fig. 9.

Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/Off

switch should only be used when it is required to shut the

chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB, EMM, and

marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all

outputs from these modules will be turned off.

1. Turn off power to the control box.

Board Addresses — The main base board (MBB) has a

3-position instance jumper that must be set to ‘1.’ The elec-

tronic expansion valve board (EXV) and energy management

board (EMM) have 4-position DIP switches. All switches are

2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropri-

ate colors for different colored cables.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug,

the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the

(–) terminal.

4. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used, but is

only intended for temporary connection (for example, a

laptop computer running Service Tool).

Table 18 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring

PART NO.

MANUFACTURER

Regular Wiring

1895

Plenum Wiring

Alpha

American

Belden

Columbia

Manhattan

Quabik

—

A48301

884421

—

M64430

—

A21451

8205

D6451

M13402

6130

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some

routines from running and may prevent the unit from start-

ing. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If

conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and

cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of

the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the

bus.

Sensors — The electronic control uses 4 to 7 thermistors to

sense temperatures for controlling chiller operation. See

Table 15. These sensors are outlined below. Thermistors RG-

TA, RGTB, EWT, LWT, and OAT are identical in temperature

versus resistance and voltage drop performance. The dual chill-

er thermistor is 5 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. Space tempera-

ture thermistor is a 10 kat 77 F (25 C). The DTT thermistor

is an 86 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. See Thermistors section

for temperature-resistance-voltage drop characteristics.

COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is

installed in a well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping

coming from the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR —The thermistor is

installed in a well in the factory-installed entering fluid piping

coming from the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-

SOR — These thermistors are installed in a well located in the

suction line of each circuit.

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) —

This sensor is factory installed on a bracket which is inserted

through the base pan of the unit.

Table 15 — Thermistor Designations

THERMISTOR CONNECTION

POINT

THERMISTOR INPUT

LWT

EWT

J8-13,14 (MBB) Cooler Leaving Fluid

J8-11,12 (MBB) Cooler Entering Fluid

J8-1,2 (MBB)

J8-3,4 (MBB)

J8-7,8 (MBB)

Circuit A Return Gas

Temperature

Circuit B (035-060 only)

Return Gas Temperature

Outdoor-Air Temperature

Sensor

RGTA

RGTB

OAT

J8-5,6 (MBB)

TB5-5,6

Accessory Remote Space

Temperature Sensor or

Dual LWT Sensor

Discharge Temperature

Thermistor

SPT

DTT

J6-1,2 (AUX)

LEGEND

DISCHARGE

TEMPERATURE

THERMISTOR

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

MBB — Main Base Board

(DTT) — This sensor is only used on units with a digital

compressor. The sensor is mounted on the discharge line close

to the discharge of the digital compressor. It attaches to the dis-

charge line using a spring clip and protects the system from

high discharge gas temperature when the digital compressor is

used. This sensor is a connected to the AUX board.

Table 16 — Status Inputs

STATUS SWITCH

Chilled Water Pump 1

Chilled Water Pump 2

Remote On/Off

Cooler Flow Switch

PIN CONNECTION POINT

J7-1,2

J7-3,4

LVT-13,14

J7-9,10

J9-11,12

J9-5,6

REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL

LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR — One of

two inputs can be connected to the LVT. See appropriate sen-

sor below.

Remote Space Temperature Sensor — Sensor (part no.

33ZCT55SPT) is an accessory sensor that is remotely mounted

in the controlled space and used for space temperature reset.

The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted thermostat

would be (in the conditioned space where it will not be sub-

jected to either a cooling or heating source or direct exposure

to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).

Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to

terminals in the unit main control box. The space temperature

sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female

connector. The RJ11 connector is used access into the Carrier

Comfort Network^®(CCN) at the sensor.

Compressor Fault Signal, A1

Compressor Fault Signal, A2

Compressor Fault Signal, B1

Compressor Fault Signal, B2

J9-8,9

J9-2,3

Table 17 — Output Relays

RELAY

NO.

DESCRIPTION

Energize Compressor A1 (010-030)

Energize Compressor A1 and Condenser Fan Contac-

tor 3 (055,060)

Energize Compressor A2 (all but 010, 015 60 Hz)

Energize Chilled Water Pump 1 Output

Energize Chilled Water Pump 2 Output

To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 10):

Energize Compressor B1 (035-050)

Energize Compressor B1 and Condenser Fan Contac-

tor 3 (055,060)

Energize Compressor B2 (035-060)

Alarm Relay

1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for

the application, connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one

SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other

SEN terminal located under the cover of the space

temperature sensor.

2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 5 and 6

on TB5 located in the unit control box.

K10

K11

Cooler/Pump Heater

Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 1 (018-060)

Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 2 (018-060)

Minimum Load Valve

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the

sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11

connector into the CCN (Fig. 11):

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of

the space temperature sensor.

4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the

space temperature sensor.

5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to

the remainder of the CCN communication bus.

Dual Leaving Water Temperature Sensor — For dual chiller

applications (parallel only are supported), connect the dual

chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (refer to Configuring

and Operating Dual Chiller Control section on page 36) to the

space temperature input of the Master chiller. If space tempera-

ture is required for reset applications, connect the sensor to the

Slave chiller and configure the slave chiller to broadcast the

value to the Master chiller.

IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector

wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus

wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 18 for

acceptable wiring.

1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color

scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)

2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the

space temperature sensor terminal block.

LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-7

ALMR

AUX

— Alarm Relay

— Auxilliary

— Boiler Relay

— Contactor, Compressor

— Circuit Breaker

CCB

— Compressor Circuit Breaker

— Crankcase Heater

CHC

COMP

CSB

CWFS

CWP

DGS

DPT

DTT

DUS

EMM

EXV

— Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor

— Compressor

— Current Sensor Board

— Chilled Water Flow Switch

— Chilled Water Pump

— Digital Scroll Compressor

— Discharge Pressure Transducer

— Discharge Temperature Thermistor

— Digital Unloader Solenoid

— Energy Management

— Electronic Expansion Valve

— Fuse Block

— Fan Contactor

FCB

FIOP

— Fan Circuit Breaker

— factory Installed Option

— Fan Relay

GND

HPS

LON

LVT

— Ground

— High-Pressure Switch

— Local Operating Network

— Low Voltage Terminal Block

— Main Base Board

MBB

MLV

— Minimum Load Valve

— Motormaster

— Motor Protector

— Manual Starter

NEC

OAT

OFM

RGT

SCCR

SPT

— National Electrical Code

— Outdoor-Air Thermistor

— Outdoor Fan Motor

— Return Gas Thermistor

— Short Circuit Current Rating

— Suction Pressure Transducer

— Switch

— Terminal Block

TNKR

TRAN

UPC

— Storage Tank Heater Relay

— Transformer

— Unitary Protocol Converter

Terminal Block

Terminal (Unmarked)

Terminal (Marked)

Splice

Factory Wiring

Field Wiring

Accessory or Option Wiring

To indicate common potential only; not to represent wiring.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV

FB-1

EMM

EXV

CHC

TRAN

CCB

AUX

CSB-A1

UPC

LON

DISCONNECT

OPTION/TB

TB4

TB1

MS- MS-

CWP1CWP2

FAN

CWP1 CWP2

C-A1

MBB

COMPRESSOR

CONTROL BOX

a30-4962

Fig. 3 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP010,015

FB-1

EXV

EMM

CHC

TRAN

CCB-2

CCB-1

FB-3

AUX

LON

CSB-A1

CSB-A2

TB1

TB4

UPC

DISCONNECT

OPTION/TB

MS- MS-

CWP1 CWP2

C-A1

FC2

C-A2

CWP1 CWP2

MBB

FC1/MM

Fig. 4 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP018-030

a30-4963

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a30-4964

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STANDARD

TERMINAL

BLOCK

OPTIONAL

DISCONNECT

CH-A1

BLU

BLK

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

CB1A

TB1A

CCB-1

CA1

CSB-A1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

COMP A1

GRN/YEL

BLU

YEL

CH-A2

BLK BLU

BLU BLK

BLU

BLK

CCB-2

BLU

CA2

CSB-A2

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLK

YEL

BLU

COMP A2

GRN/YEL

BLU

EQUIP GND

208/230V ONLY

FU5

FU6

BLK

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP

CWP1

MS-CWP1

RED

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

CWP1

WATER

PUMP

TRAN3

WHT

GRN/YEL

SECONDARY

115V

MS-CWP2

CWP2

FU4

BLK

YEL

BLU

GRN/YEL

CWP2

WATER

PUMP

BLK

GFI-CO

GRN/YEL

FIOP/ACCESSORY

LINE

BRASS SCREW

FB3

FB1

SILVER SCREW

RESET

TEST

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS FOR

SECONDARY SIDE

FC1

VOLTAGE

SERIES

100

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

575-3-60

H1-H2

H2-H4

H3-H4

H1-H4

XF-X2

OFM1

GRN/YEL

YEL

BLU

230-3-60

208-3-60

460-3-60

400,500

500

GRN-YEL

LOAD

600

FC2

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

OFM2

FUSE

NUMBER

TRAN

SIZE

REPLACE

WITH

GRN/YEL

UNIT VOLTAGE

208/230-3-60

380-3-60

FNQ-R-3.5

FNQ-R-2.5

FNQ-R-2

CHC

YEL

FU1

FU2

200VA

BLK

WHT

BLK

460-3-60

575-3-60

FNQ-R-1.5

BLK BLU

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

FU3 (24V)

200VA

500VA

NONE

FNM-10

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

HEATERS

460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60,230-3-60

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

FNQ-R-2.5

FNQ-R-3.5

(380,460,575V)

FU5

FU6

BLK

WHT

YEL

FU4 (115V)

FNM-6

FB1

(NO MM)

FB1

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

KTK-R-15

KTK-R-20

NONE

(WITH MM)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

FB2

FB3

NONE

LP-CC-20

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

NONE

MM-A

FB3

FB1

L1 T1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

L2 T2

OFM1

L3 T3

GRN/YEL

YEL

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

MMR

MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

VOLTAGE

VIO 11

240

1/4W

208/230/460/575

380

RED

FROM

13A

AUX-J4

BLK

FB2

FC2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

OFM2

GRN/YEL

CHC

BLK

WHT

BLK

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

HEATERS

(380,460,575V)

BLK

WHT

YEL

TABLE 1

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

VOLTAGE

SERIES

575-3-60

380-3-60

230-3-60

208-3-60

460-3-60

100

200

500

600

NOTES:

8. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,

REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND

WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.

ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN

COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.

C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

9. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

018,020: ALL UNITS

025,030: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL

3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF

2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.

FU1

FU2

BLK

10. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

018-020: ALL UNITS

025,030: 460V UNITS

4. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED--

THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE

PHASE CONDITIONS.

YEL

CONNECT FOR

APPROPRIATE

PRIMARY VOLTAGE

SEE TABLE 1

11. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

5. TERMINALS 13& 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION

OF REMOTE ON-OFF. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY

CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC

1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.

TRAN1

PRIMARY

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,

TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3 & H4.

7. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,

FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.

TB4

TB1

SECONDARY 24V

TB4

RED XF

BRN

FU3

RED

BRN

GRN/YEL

TB1

RED

SW2

BRN

EXV

UPC FIOP

BRN

RED

VIO

24VAC

CB3

3.2 AMPS

BRN

VIO

GND

HOT

TB4

UPC

VIO

FIOP/ACCESSORY

DGS FIOP

VIO

MBB

BRN

RED

BRN

RED

BRN

VIO

AUX

EMM

a30-4965

BRN

VIO

BRN

BLU

BRN

CWFS

Fig. 6A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Power Wiring

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CB1

3.2 AMPS

TB4

RED

TB1

TRAN1

RED

SEE NOTE

CB2

5.2 AMPS

SW2

RED

BRN

MBB J1-2

UPC GND

CWFS 3

PL1-3

RED

PL1-4

BRN

TB4

RED

BRN

SECONDARY 24V

T2 MP-A1 T1

SEE NOTE 10

RED

FU3

BRN

GRN/YEL

ORN

MBB

ORN

PL1-7

RED

PL1-8

BRN

J10A

EXV J1-2

LVT J12-5

T2 MP-A2 T1

RED

BLK

BRN A2 CHC

BRN A2 CA1

RED

GRA

BRN

RLY 11

GRA

PNK

ORN

A2 CWP1

BRN

MLV-A

MLV ACCSY

BRN

PNK

ORN

A1 FC1 A2

SEE NOTE 7

A2 CA2

A2 FC2

BRN

RLY 9

BRN

RLY 10

A2 FC1

A2 FC3

A1 FC2 A2

BRN

J10B

RLY 5

RLY 6

TB4

RED

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

LVT

J11

LVT

J12

RED

ALM

RLY 7

BRN

TB1

ACCESSORY

STORAGE TANK

HEATER RELAY

TNK

RED

ORN

TB1

RLY 8

RLY 1

RLY 2

RLY 3

RLY 4

ORN

A1 CHC A2

A1 CA1 A2

A1 CA2 A2

HPS-A

BLK

PL1-1

PL1-2

VIO

MP-A1

ORN

GRA

VIO

RED

VIO

BRN

ORN

GRA

SEE NOTE 11

PL1-5

VIO

A2 CA2

A2 CA1

PL1-6

VIO

MP-A2

BRN

SEE NOTE 11

VIO

LVT

J12

CWP

VIO

BRN

TB1

A2 CWP2

A2 CWP1

BRN

CWP

RED

FIOP OR

FIELD INSTALLED

OPTION

SEE NOTES ON

PAGE 24.

LVT

J12

HEAT

FIELD INSTALLED

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

GRA

ALMR

VIO

BRN

HEAT/BOILER FIELD

INSTALLED WIRING

LVT

J11

CWFS

BLK

WHT

EXV

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

CWPI

SEE

WHT

BLK

NOTE

ORN

MARQUEE

DISPLAY

PL-EXVA

BLK

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

WHT

BLK

WHT

YEL

WHT

BLK

EXV-A

GRY

GRN

RED

BRN

RED

MAIN

BASE

BOARD

RED

CSB

ORN

PL50-1

DUS

BRN

VIO

RED

AUX

RED

CH1

BRN

BLK

CSB

SW1

ENABLE

RED

ORN

PL50-2

PL50-3

BRN

OFF

RED

DTT

CH11

REMOTE

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

ON-OFF

SWITCH

(SEE NOTE

CSB

BLK

WHT

RED

ORN

PL50-4

RED

GRA

BRN

DGS OR

FIOP

RED

CH9

RED

BLK

CSB

TO MM-A

ORN

BRN

OFF

CH10

RGTA

DARK

RED

DUAL

SETPOINT

SWITCH LOCATION

BLK

RED

CWP2

RED

LVT

J12

T55

LVT

J10

BLU

T-55

SEN

GRA

RED

BLU

ACCSY

BLU

EMM

VIO

CWP1

VIO

OAT

ICE DONE

DLS STEP

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

SPACE TEMPERATURE

ACCESSORY OR

DUAL CHILLER LWT

BLK

LVT

EVAPORATOR ENTERING

FLUID TEMP

RED

J13

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR LEAVING

FLUID TEMP

RED

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

WHT

BLK

FIOP/

ACCESSORY

DEMAND

LIMIT

4-20mA

BLK

WHT

RED

VIO

BRN

UPC

TEMP

RESET

4-20mA

PORT

ORN

PNK

RED

BLK

NET

LON

OPTION

RED

NET

N/C

COOLING

SETPOINT

4-20mA

J3 GND

NET

DPTA

GRN

BLK

WHT

SIGNAL

RED

PORT 1A

NET

SPTA

GRN

BLK

SHIELD

UPC OPT

a30-4966

Fig. 6B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Control Wiring

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STANDARD

TERMINAL

BLOCK

CH-A1

OPTIONAL

DISCONNECT

BLU

BLK

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

CCB-1

CB1A

CA1

CSB-A1

TB1A

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

COMP A1

GRN/YEL

BLU

YEL

CH-A2

BLK BLU

BLU BLK

BLU

BLK

CCB-2

BLU

CA2

CSB-A2

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLK

YEL

BLU

COMP A2

GRN/YEL

BLU

208/230V ONLY

EQUIP GND

CH-B1

BLU

BLK

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

CSB-B1

CCB-3

CB1

FU5

FU6

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

RED

YEL

COMP B1

GRN/YEL

BLU

YEL

TRAN3

WHT

CH-B2

BLU BLK

SECONDARY

115V

BLU

BLK

FU4

GRN/YEL

CCB-4

CB2

CSB-B2

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLK

YEL

BLU

GFI-CO

COMP B2

GRN/YEL

FIOP/ACCESSORY

BLU

LINE

208/230V ONLY

BRASS SCREW

SILVER SCREW

RESET

TEST

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS FOR

SECONDARY SIDE

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP

CWP1

VOLTAGE

SERIES

100

MS-CWP1

BLK

YEL

BLU

575-3-60

H1-H2

H2-H4

H3-H4

H1-H4

XF-X2

230-3-60

208-3-60

460-3-60

400,500

500

CWP1

WATER

PUMP

GRN-YEL

LOAD

600

GRN/YEL

MS-CWP2

CWP2

BLK

YEL

BLU

CWP2

WATER

PUMP

FUSE

NUMBER

TRAN

SIZE

REPLACE

WITH

UNIT VOLTAGE

208/230-3-60

380-3-60

FNQ-R-3.5

FNQ-R-2.5

FNQ-R-2

GRN/YEL

FU1

FU2

200VA

460-3-60

575-3-60

FNQ-R-1.5

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

FU3 (24V)

200VA

500VA

NONE

FNM-10

FB3

FB1

460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60,230-3-60

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

FNQ-R-2.5

FNQ-R-3.5

FC1

FU5

FU6

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK 11

YEL

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

FU4 (115V)

FNM-6

OFM3

GRN/YEL

FB1

(NO MM)

FB1

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

KTK-R-15

KTK-R-20

LP-CC-20

BLU 13

BLK

NONE

(WITH MM)

FB2

575-3-60

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

CHC

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60

FB3

LP-CC-20

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

BLK

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

(380,460,575V)

BLK

WHT

YEL

NOTES:

SEE NOTE 7

BLK

FCB2/FB2

FC2

9. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,

REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND

WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.

ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN

COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK 11

2. USE 75 C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

10. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035-045: ALL UNITS

050-060: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL

YEL

BLU

OFM1

YEL

3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF

2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.

BLU

GRN/YEL

11. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035-045: ALL UNITS

050-060: 460V UNITS

4. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED--

THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE

PHASE CONDITIONS.

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

12. MP-B1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035,040: ALL UNITS

045-060: 460V UNITS

13. MP-B2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035,040: ALL UNITS

045-060: 460V UNITS

5. TERMINALS 13& 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION

OF REMOTE ON-OFF. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY

CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC

1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.

OFM2

YEL

BLK BLU

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,

TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3

GRN/YEL

& H4.

FC3

14. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

7. FOR 575-3-60V UNITS, FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER FCB2

IS REPLACED WITH FUSE BLOCK FB2.

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

8. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,

030-050: FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.

055,060: FAN CONTACTOR FC3 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR..

OFM4

(055,060 ONLY)

BLK

YEL

GRN/YEL

(055,060 ONLY)

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

TABLE 1

SERIES

TABLE 2

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

MM-A

FB3

FB1

VOLTAGE

SERIES

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

L1 T1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

575-3-60

380-3-60

230-3-60

208-3-60

460-3-60

100

200

500

600

575-3-60

380-3-60

230-3-60

208-3-60

460-3-60

100

200

500

600

COM

575

380

230

208

460

OFM3 (035-050)

OFM4 (055,060)

L2 T2

L3 T3

GRN/YEL

YEL

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

MMR

MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

FU1

FU2

BLK

YEL

VIO 11

VOLTAGE

208/230/460/575

380

BLK

YEL

240

1/4W

RED

BLK

FROM

AUX-J4

13A

CONNECT FOR

APPROPRIATE

PRIMARY VOLTAGE

SEE TABLE 1

CONNECT FOR

APPROPRIATE

575

460

400

380

230

PRIMARY VOLTAGE

SEE TABLE 2

CHC

TRAN2

PRIMARY

TRAN1

PRIMARY

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

BLK

208

COM

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

CB4

3.2 AMPS

(380,460,575V)

SECONDARY 24V

TB4

CHC

RED XF

BRN

RED

FU3

YEL

BLK

WHT

GRN/YEL

TB1

GRN/YEL

RED

SEE NOTE 7

BLK

FCB2/FB2

SW2

RED

FC2

BRN

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BRN

EXV

YEL

BLU

OFM1

UPC FIOP

24VAC

BRN

RED

VIO

GRN/YEL

CB3

3.2 AMPS

BRN

VIO

GND

HOT

TB4

UPC

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

VIO

FIOP/ACCESSORY

OFM2

DGS FIOP

VIO

MBB

GRN/YEL

BRN

RED

BRN

RED

BRN

VIO

AUX

EMM

FC1

a30-

5283

BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

YEL

OFM3

(055,060 ONLY)

BLU

BRN

GRN/YEL

(055,060 ONLY)

VIO

BRN

BLU

BRN

CWFS

Fig. 7A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Power Wiring

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CB1

3.2 AMPS

TB4

a30-5284

RED

TB1

TRAN1

RED

SEE NOTE 10

CB2

5.2 AMPS

SW2

RED

BRN

MBB J1-2

UPC GND

CWFS 3

PL1-3

RED

PL1-4

BRN

TB4

RED

BRN

SECONDARY 24V

T2 MP-A1 T1

SEE NOTE 11

RED

FU3

BRN

GRN/YEL

ORN

MBB

ORN

PL1-7

RED

PL1-8

BRN

J10A

BRN A2 CB1

T2 MP-A2 T1

SEE NOTE 12

RED

BRN

LVT J12-5

BLK

PL2-3

RED

PL2-4

BRN

BRN A2 CHC

BRN A2 CA1

BLU

GRA

T2 MP-B1 T1

SEE NOTE 13

RED

RLY 11

GRA

BRN

A2 CWP1

BRN

PL2-7

RED

PL2-8

BRN

T2 MP-B2 T1

MLV-A

MLV ACCSY

BRN

PNK

A1 FC1 A2

SEE NOTE 8

A2 CA2

A2 FC2

PNK

BRN

RLY 9

LEGEND

BRN

TERMINAL BLOCK

TERMINAL (UNMARKED)

TERMINAL (MARKED)

SPLICE

A2 FC1

A2 FC3

BRN

FACTORY WIRING

FIELD WIRING

RLY 10

ORN

BLK

VIO

ORN

VIO

PNK

A1 FC2 A2

ACCESSORY OR OPTION WIRING

HPS-B

TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIAL

ONLY,NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING

J10B

BLU

BLK

BLU

BRN

TB1

PL2-1

PL2-2

PL2-6

MP-B1

ACCSY

ALMR

AUX

CCB

CHC

COMP

CSB

CWFS

CWP

CWPI

DGS

DLS

DPT

DTT

DUS

EMM

EWT

EXV

ACCESSORY

ALARM RELAY

AUXILIARY

BOILER RELAY

CONTACTOR, COMPRESSOR

CIRCUIT BREAKER

VIO

A2 CB2

RLY 5

CB1

FR3

VIO

PNK

BRN

SEE NOTE 14

PL2-5

VIO

(055,060 ONLY)

MP-B2

RLY 6

PNK

RED

VIO

A2 CB1

A1 CB2 A2

BRN

COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

CRANKCASE HEATER

COOLER/PUMP HEATER CONTACTOR

CONVENIENCE OUTLET

COMPRESSOR

CURRENT SENSOR BOARD

CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH

CHILLED WATER PUMP

CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK

DIGITAL SCROLL

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH

DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR

DIGITAL UNLOADER SOLENOID

ENERGY MANAGEMENT

ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE

EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL BOARD

FUSE BLOCK

TB4

BRN

SEE NOTE 14

VIO

FR4

(055,060 ONLY)

LVT

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

LVT

J11

J12

RED

ALM

RED

TB1

RLY 7

ACCESSORY

STORAGE TANK

HEATER RELAY

TNK

RED

ORN

BLK

ORN

TB1

RLY 8

RLY 1

RLY 2

RLY 3

RLY 4

ORN

A1 CHC A2

HPS-A

BLK

BRN

PL1-1

PL1-2

VIO

MP-A1

VIO

A2 CA2

FAN CONTACTOR

ORN

A1 CA1 A2

FCB

FIOP

FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER

FACTORY INSTALLED OPTION

FAN RELAY

BRN

SEE NOTE 14

PL1-5

VIO

FR1

(055,060 ONLY)

PL1-6

VIO

MP-A2

FUSE

GROUND

GRA

A2 CA1

GRA

A1 CA2 A2

BRN

GND

HPS

LVT

LWT

MBB

MLV

HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

HEAT RELAY

LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL

LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE

MAIN BASE BOARD

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

MOTORMASTER

MOTORMASTER RELAY

MODULAR MOTOR PROTECTOR

MANUAL STARTER

SEE NOTE 14

VIO

FR2

VIO

TAN

RED

LVT

J12

CWP

VIO

RED

BRN

TB1

A2 CWP2

A2 CWP1

BRN

MMR

CWP

OAT

OFM

OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR

OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR

PLUG

FIOP OR

FIELD INSTALLED

OPTION

FR4

RELAY

LVT

(055,060 ONLY)

RGT

RLY

SAT

SCCR

SPT

RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE

RELAY

SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE

SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING

SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

SWITCH

TERMINAL BLOCK

STORAGE TANK HEATER RELAY

TRANSFORMER

PNK

TAN

J12

HEAT

FIELD INSTALLED

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

FR3

GRA

(055,060 ONLY)

FR2

ALMR

TNKR

TRAN

UPC

VIO

BRN

UNITARY PROTOCOL CONVERTER

(055,060 ONLY)

HEAT/BOILER FIELD

INSTALLED WIRING

TAN

FR1

A2 FC2

PNK

A1 FC3 A2

BRN

LVT

J11

(055,060 ONLY)

CWFS

(055,060 ONLY)

SEE NOTE 8

BLK

WHT

PL-EXVB

BLK

YEL

EXV

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

CWPI

SEE

EXV-B

WHT

BLK

GRY

RED

NOTE

GRN

RED

ORN

MARQUEE

DISPLAY

PL-EXVA

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

YEL

BLK

WHT

RED

WHT

EXV-A

GRY

RED

GRN

RED

BRN

RED

BRN

MAIN

BASE

BOARD

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

PL50-1

DUS

DTT

VIO

RED

AUX

CH1

BRN

BLK

CSB

SW1

ENABLE

RED

PL50-2

PL50-3

OFF

RED

CH11

REMOTE

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

ON-OFF

SWITCH

(SEE NOTE

CSB

DGS OR

FIOP

BLK

WHT

RED

PL50-4

RED

GRA

CH9

RED

BLK

CSB

TO MM-A

OFF

CH10

RGTA

RGTB

DARK

RED

DUAL

SETPOINT

SWITCH LOCATION

BLK

RED

CWP2

RED

LVT

J12

BLK

BLU

RED

T55

LVT

J10

T-55

SEN

GRA

RED

BLU

ACCSY

EMM

VIO

CWP1

VIO

OAT

ICE DONE

DLS STEP

BLK

WHT

RED

SPACE TEMPERATURE

ACCESSORY OR

DUAL CHILLER LWT

BLK

LVT

EVAPORATOR ENTERING

FLUID TEMP

RED

J13

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR LEAVING

FLUID TEMP

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

WHT

BLK

FIOP/

ACCESSORY

DPTB

GRN

BLK

RED

DEMAND

LIMIT

4-20mA

BLK

WHT

RED

VIO

BRN

SPTB

DPTA

SPTA

GRN

BLK

UPC

TEMP

RESET

4-20mA

PORT

ORN

PNK

RED

BLK

NET

LON

OPTION

RED

NET

N/C

COOLING

SETPOINT

4-20mA

J3 GND

NET

GRN

BLK

WHT

SIGNAL

RED

PORT 1A

NET

GRN

BLK

SHIELD

UPC OPT

Fig. 7B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Control Wiring

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RED LED - STATUS

GREEN LED -

LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

YELLOW LED -

CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)

INSTANCE JUMPER

CEPL130346-01

K11

K10

STATUS

J10

LEN

CCN

Fig. 8 — Main Base Board

a30-4967

Fig. 9 — Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and Emergency On/Off Switch Locations

T-55 SPACE

SENSOR

a30-4968

SPT (T10) PART NO. 33ZCT55SPT

SENSOR

CCN+

LVT

TO CCN

CCN GND

SEN

COMM 1

BUS (PLUG)

AT UNIT

CCN-

Fig. 10 — Typical Space Temperature

Sensor Wiring

Fig. 11 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring

to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

compressor to start next. If no compressors have been running

for more than 30 minutes and the leaving fluid temperature is

greater than the saturated condensing temperature, the wear

factor is still used to determine which compressor to start next.

If the leaving fluid temperature is less than the saturated con-

densing temperature, then the control will start either compres-

sor A1 or compressor B1 first, depending on the user-configu-

rable circuit lead-lag value. For units with the minimum load

control valve, the A circuit with the minimum load valve is al-

ways the lead circuit. The A circuit is also always the lead for

units with the digital compressor option. On units with the dig-

ital scroll option, the A1 compressor operates continuously,

providing close leaving chilled water control. For this reason,

on/off cycling of the unit’s compressors is dramatically re-

duced, which in turn reduces wear associated with compressor

start/stop cycles.

Energy Management Module (Fig. 12) — This

factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed accessory is

used for the following types of temperature reset, demand

limit, and/or ice features:

•

4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires

field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

4 to 20 mA cooling set point reset (requires field-

supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires field-

supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,

50 mA load)

4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to

20 mA generator)

•

Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires field-

supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,

50 mA load)

The EXVs will provide a controlled start-up. During start-

up, the low pressure logic will be bypassed for 2¹/₂minutes to

allow for the transient changes during start-up. As additional

stages of compression are required, the processor control will

add them. See Table 19.

See Demand Limit and Temperature Reset sections on

pages 41 and 37 for further details.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-

turer’s control systems due to possible power supply

differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.

The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.

ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A

signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave

bridge signal generating device is used.

If a circuit is to be stopped, the compressor with the lowest

wear factor will be shut off first except when a digital compres-

sor is used. The digital compressor is always the last compres-

sor to shut off.

The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The

algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired

set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and

leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at

which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based

on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio is calculated using

the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any

changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value

ranges from –100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a

compressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the

ratio reaches +100% (–100%). If installed, the minimum load

valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity.

Minimum load valve value is a fixed 30% in the total capacity

calculation. The control will also use the minimum load valve

solenoid as the last stage of capacity before turning off the last

compressor. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity

step change. Refer to Table 19.

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection —

proof-of-

cooler flow device is factory installed in all chillers. It is recom-

mended that proper operation of the switch be verified on a reg-

ular basis.

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) — All units are

equipped from the factory with EXVs. Each refrigeration cir-

cuit is also supplied with a factory-installed liquid line filter

drier and sight glass.

The EXV is set at the factory to maintain 9° F (5.0° C) suc-

tion superheat leaving the cooler by metering the proper

amount of refrigerant into the cooler. The superheat set point is

adjustable, but should not be adjusted unless absolutely

necessary.

MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed

only in the network display tables (using Service Tool,

ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS^®software) and

represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit will start

its initialization routine. This value can be zero without the

machine running in many situations. This can include being

unoccupied, ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch in

the OFF position, CCN not allowing unit to start, Demand

Limit in effect, no call for cooling due to no load, and alarm or

alert conditions present. If the machine should be running and

none of the above are true, a minimum off time (DELY, see

below) may be in effect. The machine should start normally

once the time limit has expired.

The EXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction

temperature to 50 F (12.8 C). This makes it possible for unit to

start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the

compressor.

Capacity Control — The control system cycles com-

pressors, digital scroll modulting solenoid (if equipped), and

minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to maintain the

user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. En-

tering fluid temperature is used by the main base board (MBB)

to determine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used

in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity

stages. The chilled fluid temperature set point can be automati-

cally reset by the return fluid temperature, space, or outdoor-air

temperature reset features. It can also be reset from an external

4 to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module FIOP

or accessory).

The standard control has an automatic lead-lag feature built

in which determines the wear factor (combination of starts and

run hours) for each compressor. If all compressors are off and

less than 30 minutes has elapsed since the last compressor was

turned off, the wear factor is used to determine which

MINUTES

OFF

TIME

(ConfigurationOPT2

DELY) — This user-configurable time period is used by the

control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after

power is applied/restored to the unit. Typically, this time period

is configured when multiple machines are located on a single

site. For example, this gives the user the ability to prevent all

the units from restarting at once after a power failure. A value

of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be

running.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CEBD430351-0396-01C

LEN

STATUS

TEST 2

GREEN LED -

LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

ADDRESS

DIP SWITCH

RED LED - STATUS

Fig. 12 — Energy Management Module

LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION — This is a configurable

choice and is factory set to be automatic for all units unless the

unit is equipped with a digital scroll compressor or minimum

load, then circuit A is lead (ConfigurationOPT2 LLCS).

The value can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading as

desired. Set at automatic, the control will sum the current num-

ber of logged circuit starts and one-quarter of the current oper-

ating hours for each circuit. The circuit with the lowest sum is

started first. Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and

which is the lag are also made when total machine capacity is

at 100% or when there is a change in the direction of capacity

(increase or decrease) and each circuit’s capacity is equal.

when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of

capacity.

Slow Change Override — The control prevents the capacity

stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature

is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and

moving towards the set point.

Ramp Loading

—

Ramp

(Configura-

tionSLCTCRMP) limits the rate of change of leaving

fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and config-

ured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons be-

fore deciding to change stages of capacity. The control calcu-

lates a temperature difference between the control point and

leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater than 4° F

(2.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more

than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP),

the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of

capacity.

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following over-

rides will modify the normal operation of the routine.

Deadband Multiplier — The user configurable Deadband

Multiplier (ConfigurationSLCTZ.GN) has a default val-

ue of 1.0. The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than

1.0, this factor is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor.

The larger this value is set, the longer the control will delay be-

tween adding or removing stages of capacity. Figure 13 shows

how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving

water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and

below the set point. This value should be set in the range of 3.0

to 4.0 for systems with small loop volumes.

Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading — When the

entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the

control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being

used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes

an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary. The

lowest stage will not be removed.

Minimum Load Control — If equipped, the minimum load

control valve is energized only when one compressor is run-

ning on circuit A. If the close control feature is enabled the

minimum load control valve may be used as needed to obtain

leaving fluid temperature close to set point.

First Stage Override — If the current capacity stage is zero,

the control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding

the first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 19 — Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units with Minimum Load Valve

CAPACITY STEPS

CAPACITY %

CONTROL

STEPS

30RAP UNIT SIZE

% Displacement

Circuit A

100

Circuit B

010

015

100

—

100

018

020

025

030

100

—

20*

100

24*

100

29*

100

32*

100

035

040

045

050

055

100

11*

100

12*

100

14*

100

13*

100

060

16*

*Minimum Load Valve energized.

NOTE: These capacity steps may vary due to different capacity

staging sequences.

2 STARTS

DEADBAND EXAMPLE

200

400

600

800

1000

3 STARTS

TIME (SECONDS)

STANDARD

DEADBAND

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

MODIFIED

DEADBAND

Fig. 13 — Deadband Multiplier

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cooler Freeze Protection — The control will try to prevent

shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm

by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected

is Water, the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). If the cooler fluid

selected is Brine, the freeze point is the Brine Freeze Point (Set

PointsFRZBR.FZ). This alarm condition (A207) only

references leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze

point. If the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the

freeze point plus 2.0° F (1.1° C), the control will immediately

remove one stage of capacity. This can be repeated once every

30 seconds.

Low Saturated Suction Protection — The control will try to

prevent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction

conditions by removing stages of capacity. These circuit alert

conditions (T116, T117) compare saturated suction tempera-

ture to the configured Brine Freeze Point (Set

PointsFRZBR.FZ). The Brine Freeze point is a user-

configurable value that must be left at 34 F (1.1 C) for 100%

water systems. A lower value may be entered for systems with

brine solutions, but this value should be set according to the

freeze protection level of the brine mixture. Failure to properly

set this brine freeze point value may permanently damage the

brazed plate heat exchanger. The control will initiate Mode 7

(Circuit A) or Mode 8 (Circuit B) to indicate a circuit’s capaci-

ty is limited and that eventually the circuit may shut down.

be added to the current fan stage. Fan On Set Point (F.ON)

equals Head Set Point (Set PointsHEADH.DP) except

after a fan stage increase when the Head Set Point is increased

by Fan Stage Delta (Set PointsHEADF.DLT). A fan

stage is decreased when the SCTs of both circuits are less than

the Fan Off Set Point (Set PointsHEAD F.OFF) for

two minutes. Table 20 shows the number of fan stages, contac-

tors energized and the fans that are on during the fan stage.

Unit sizes 035 to 060 have common fan control. Figure 14

shows the location of each fan and compressor within the unit.

MOTORMASTER^®V OPTION — Motormaster V is stan-

dard on 30RAP010 and 015 size units. For all other units that

need low-ambient operation, the lead fan on a circuit can be

equipped with the Motormaster V head pressure controller op-

tion or accessory. The controller is energized with the first fan

stage and adjusts fan speed to maintain a SCT of 72 F (22.2 C).

The first stage of fan operation is controlled by the Motormas-

ter V controller. Refer to Fig. 15 for condenser fan layout infor-

mation. The Motormaster is configured in the Motormaster Se-

lect (ConfigurationMMMMR.S)

Operation of Machine Based on Control

Method and Cooling Set Point Selection Set-

tings — Machine On/Off control is determined by the

configuration of the Control Method

(Configura-

tionOPT2CTRL) and Cooling Set Point Select (Config-

urationSLCTCLSP) variables. All units are factory

configured with Cooling Set Point Select set to 0 (single set

point). With the control method set to 0, simply switching the

Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote

Contact position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller

in an occupied state. The control mode (Operating

ModesMODE) will be 1 (OFF LOCAL) when the switch is

Off and will be 5 (ON LOCAL) when in the Enable position or

Remote Contact position with external contacts closed.

Head Pressure Control — The main base board

(MBB) controls the condenser fans to maintain the lowest

condensing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit

efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing tempera-

ture input from the discharge pressure transducer and outside

air temperature sensor to control the fans. If OAT is greater

than 70 F before a circuit is starting, then all condenser fan

stages will be energized. A fan stage is increased based on

SCT (saturated condensing temperature). When the highest

SCT is greater than the Fan On Set Point (Set

PointsHEADF.ON), then an additional stage of fan will

170

160

150

140

130

120

110

100

-30

-20

-10

SST (F)

LEGEND

a30-4969

SCT

SST

—

Saturated Condensing Temperature

Saturated Suction Temperature

Fig. 14 — Operating Envelope for R-410A Compressor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OFM1

OFM2

a30-4970

OFM1

Top View

Sizes 010,015

Top View

Sizes 018-030

OFM1

OFM3

OFM1

OFM3

OFM2

OFM4

OFM2

Top View

Sizes 035-050

Top View

Sizes 055,060

Fig. 15 — 30RAP Condenser Fan Layout

Table 20 — Fan Stages

FAN STAGES

Contactor Energized

30RAP UNIT SIZE

Fan Stage

Fans Operating

010,015

018-030

Stage 1

Stage 2

—

FC1

FC1,2

OFM1

OFM1,2

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Stage 4

FC1

FC2

OFM3

OFM1,2

OFM1,2,3

OFM4

OFM4,3

OFM4,1,2

OFM1,2,3,4

035-050

055,060

FC1,2

FC3

FC1,3

FC3,2

FC1,2,3

Two other control methods are available for Machine On/

Off control:

OCCUPANCY

CTRL = 2) — The main base board will use the operating

schedules as defined under the Time Clock mode in the scroll-

ing marquee display. These schedules are identical. The sched-

ule number must be set to 1 for local schedule.

The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99

for operation under a CCN global schedule. The Enable/Off/

Remote Contact must be in the Enable or Remote Contact posi-

tion. The control mode (Operating ModesMODE) will be

1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 3 when the

Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and the time of

day is during an unoccupied period. Similarly, the control

mode will be 7 when the time of day is during an occupied

period.

CCN CONTROL (ConfigurationOPT2CTRL = 3) —

An external CCN device such as Chillervisor System Manager

controls the On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device

forces the variable ‘CHIL_S_S’ between Start/Stop to control

the chiller. The control mode (Operating ModesMODE)

will be 1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 2

when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and

the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Stop.’ Similarly, the control mode

will be 6 when the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Start.’

Table 20 illustrates how the control method and cooling set

point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the

set point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the

ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations.

SCHEDULE

(ConfigurationOPT2

Cooling Set Point Select

SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1

(Set PointsCOOLCSP.1).

DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set

Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) when the Dual Set

Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set

PointsCOOLCSP.2) when they are closed.

DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on

Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) during the

Occupied mode and Cooling Set Point

(Set

PointsCOOLCSP.2) during the Unoccupied mode as

configured under the local occupancy schedule accessible only

from CCN. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR (See Ap-

pendix B) must be configured to 1. If the Schedule Number is

set to 0, the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied

mode. Control method must be configured to 0 (switch). See

Table 21.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 21 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points

COOLING SET POINT SELECT (CLSP)

CONTROL

TYPE

(CTRL)

OCCUPANCY

STATE

(single)

(dual, switch)

(dual, occ)

(4 to 20 mA)

Occupied

Unoccupied

Occupied

Unoccupied

Occupied

Unoccupied

ON,CSP1

OFF

ON,CSP1

ON*

OFF

ON*

ON,CSP1

ON,CSP2

Illegal

ON,CSP1

ON,CSP2

ON†

OFF

ON†

0 (switch)

2 (Occupancy)

3 (CCN)

*Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed.

†Cooling set point determined from 4 to 20 mA input to energy management module (EMM) to terminals TB6-3,5.

4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external

4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module

(EMM).

under the COMP mode will stay on for 10 minutes if there is

no keypad activity. Compressors will stay on until they are

turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will remain

enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors run-

ning. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a

compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other

mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during

the TEST mode. The MODE item (Run StatusVIEW) will

display “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST

sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chill-

er can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal

operation.

Low Sound Mode Operation — All models are fac-

tory configured with the Low Sound Mode disabled. In the

Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2, items for Low

Sound Mode Select (ConfigurationOPT2LS.MD), Low

Sound Start Time (ConfigurationOPT2LS.ST), Low

Sound End Time (ConfigurationOPT2LS.ND) and Low

Sound Capacity Limit (ConfigurationOPT2LS.LT) are

factory configured so that the chiller always runs as quietly as

possible. This results in operation at increased saturated con-

densing temperature. As a result, some models may not be able

to achieve rated efficiency. For chiller operation at rated effi-

ciency, disable the low sound mode or adjust the low sound

mode start and stop times accordingly or set both times to

00:00 for rated efficiency operation 24 hours per day. In addi-

tion, the low sound capacity limit can be used to reduce overall

chiller capacity, if required, by limiting the maximum to a user-

configured percentage.

Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Pack-

age — If the chiller has factory-installed chilled fluid pumps,

specific steps should be followed for proper operation.

The pump(s) in the hydronic package come factory

pre-wired into the main unit power supply/starter. In order to

check proper pump rotation, use the Service Test function to

test the condenser fans and observe them for proper rotation. If

fans turn correctly, the pumps will rotate correctly. Clockwise

rotation of the pump motor cooling fans can also be used to de-

termine that pumps are rotating correctly.

Heating Operation — The chiller can be used for pump

outputs or optional factory-installed hydronic system operation

can be utilized for heating applications. The heating mode is

activated when the control sees a field-supplied closed switch

input to terminal block LVT-19,20. The control locks out cool-

ing when the heat relay input is seen. A field-supplied boiler re-

lay connection is made using heat relay and alarm relay con-

tacts. Factory-installed ‘BOILER’ connections exist in the con-

trol panel near LVT for these applications. Alarms and alerts

A189 through A202 are active during heating operation.

CAUTION

Operation of pump in wrong direction, even for a few

seconds, can cause irreversible damage to pump impeller

and housing. Always verify correct wiring/pump rotation

before operation.

Use Service Test function to test operation of pumps. Verify

that the flow switch input is made when the pump is running.

For dual pump hydronic systems, the control only uses one

pump at a time. Consult the Installation Instructions supplied

with this chiller and use the circuit setter balancing valve

installed in hydronic package to adjust fluid flow rate.

Service Test (See Table 4) — Both main power and

control circuit power must be on.

The Service Test function should be used to verify proper

operation of condenser fan(s), compressors, minimum load

valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s), EXVs, and re-

mote alarm relay. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/

Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use

the display keys and Table 4 to enter the mode and display

Cooler Pump Control — The AquaSnap® 30RAP ma-

chines equipped with a factory-installed pump package are

configured with the Cooler Pump Control (Configura-

tionOPT1CPC) = ON.

Machines not equipped with a pump package are config-

ured with the cooler pump control OFF. It is recommended that

the machine control the chilled water pump. If not, a 5-minute

time delay is required after the command to shut the machine

down is sent before the chilled water pump is turned off. This is

required to maintain water flow during the shutdown period of

the machine.

With or without this option enabled, the cooler pump relay

will be energized when the machine enters an ON status (i.e.,

On Local, On CCN, On Time). An A207 - Cooler Freeze

Protection Alarm, will energize the cooler pump relay also, as

an override. The cooler pump relay will remain energized if the

machine is in MODE 10 – Minimum Off Time.

TEST. Press

twice so that OFF flashes. Enter the

ENTER

password if required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST

value to the ON position and press . Press

ENTER

ESCAPE

and the

button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode.

Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by

changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete

outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for

10 minutes. Use the arrow keys to select the desired percentage

when testing expansion valves and Motormaster^®V controller.

When testing compressors, lead compressor must be started

first. All compressor outputs can be turned on, but the control

will limit the rate by staging one compressor per minute. Com-

pressor unloaders and hot gas bypass relays/solenoids (if in-

stalled) can be tested with the compressors on or off. The relays

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

interlock contacts should be rated for dry circuit application

capable of handling 5 vdc at 2 mA.

SINGLE INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a single

pump, the following options must be configured:

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation — At any-

time the unit is in an ON status, as defined by the one of the

following conditions, the cooler pump relay will be enabled.

1. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE,

(CTRL=0).

• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =

2. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with

ON.

Start-Stop remote contact closure (CTRL=0).

• Cooler Pump

PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump

PM2E) = NO.

Enable (ConfigurationOPT1

3. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule

in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=2).

4. A CCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination

with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=3).

As stated before, there are certain alarm conditions and

Operating Modes that will turn the cooler pump relay ON. This

sequence will describe the normal operation of the pump

control algorithm.

When the unit cycles from an “On” state to an “Off” state,

the cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler

Pump Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1PM.DY).

This is configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default

is 1 minute.

NO INTEGRAL PUMP — SINGLE EXTERNAL PUMP

CONTROL — With a single external pump, the following

options must be configured:

With a single integral pump, the Cooler Pump Starter will

be energized when the machine is occupied. As part of the

factory-installed package, an auxiliary set of contacts is wired

to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump Interlock. When

the mechanical cooling is called for, the pump interlock and

flow switch is checked. If the circuits are closed, the machine

starts its capacity routine. If the auxiliary contact interlock does

not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T190 —

Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert

will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not

be allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not

close within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A

T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up

Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at

Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be al-

lowed to start.

• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =

OFF.

• Cooler Pump

PM1E) = NO.

• Cooler Pump

PM2E) = NO.

The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump

Starter is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter coil

is powered from the chiller control system. The starter should

be wired between LVT-25 and LVT-21. If equipped, the field-

installed chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should

be connected in series with the chilled water flow switch.

The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the

machine is “On.” The chilled water pump interlock circuit

consists of a chilled water flow switch and a field-installed

chilled water pump interlock. If the chilled water pump inter-

lock circuit does not close within five (5) minutes of starting,

an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up

Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.

If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow

switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being

closed, an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened

During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the ma-

chine will stop.

Enable (ConfigurationOPT1

If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds

after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1

Running Alert and an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts

Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated

and the machine will stop.

If the control detects the chilled water pump interlock open

for 25 seconds after initially being closed, a T194 — Cooler

a30-4979

Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert is

generated and the unit is shut down.

If the control detects the chilled water flow switch circuit

closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output OFF, an

A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off

Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to

start.

If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary

contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is

OFF, a T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While

Pump Off Alert is generated. The chiller will not be allowed to

start.

If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit

closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 — Cooler Pump and

Aux Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit

will be prevented from starting.

As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pump can be

started to maintain lubrication of the pump seal. To utilize this

function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (ConfigurationOPT1

PM.P.S) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the

factory default. With this feature enabled, if the pump is not op-

erating, it will be started and operated for 2 seconds starting at

14:00 hours. If the pump is operating, this routine is skipped. If

the pump has failed and an Alarm/Alert condition is active, the

pump will not start that day.

NO INTEGRAL PUMP — DUAL EXTERNAL PUMP

CONTROL — With two external pumps, the following

options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =

ON.

• Cooler Pump

PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump

PM2E) = YES.

Enable (ConfigurationOPT1

The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump

Starters is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter

coil is powered from the chiller control system. The starter for

Chilled Water Pump 1 should be wired between LVT-25 and

LVT-21. The starter for Chilled Water Pump 2 should be wired

between LVT-24 and LVT-21. A field-installed chilled water

pump interlock for each pump must be connected to each

pump’s interlock points on the main base board. The chilled

water pump 1 interlock, CWP1, must be connected to MBB-

J7-1 and –2. The chilled water pump 2 interlock, CWP2, must

be connected to MBB-J7-3 and –4. The chilled water pump

DUAL INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a dual inte-

gral pump package, the following options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) =

ON.

• Cooler Pump

PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump

PM2E) = YES.

Enable (ConfigurationOPT1

Pump Start Selection is a field-configurable choice. Cooler

Pump Select (ConfigurationOPT1PM.SL) is factory

defaulted to 0 (Automatic). This value can be changed to 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(Pump 1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First). If PM.SL is 0

(Automatic), the pump selection is based on two criteria: the

alert status of a pump and the operational hours on the pump. If

a pump has an active Alert condition, it will not be considered

for the lead pump. The pump with the lowest operational hours

will be the lead pump. A pump is selected by the control to start

and continues to be the lead pump until the Pump Changeover

Hours (ConfigurationOPT1PM.DT) is reached. The

Lead Pump (Run StatusVIEWLD.PM) indicates the

pump that has been selected as the lead pump: 1 (Pump 1), 2

(Pump 2), 3 (No Pump). The Pump Changeover Hours is facto-

ry defaulted to 500 hours. Regardless of the Cooler Pump Se-

lection, any pump that has an active alert will not be allowed to

start.

With the dual integral pump package, the Cooler Pump

Starter will be energized when the machine is in an occupied

period. As part of the factory-installed package, an auxiliary set

of contacts is wired to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump

Interlock, one set for each pump to individual channels on the

MBB. With a call for mechanical cooling, the specific pump

interlock and flow switch are checked. If the circuits are closed,

the machine starts its capacity routine. If Pump 1 starts and the

auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of

the ON command, a T190 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts

Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the

pump shut down. The unit will not be allowed to start. If the

chilled water flow switch does not close within 1 minute, two

alarms will be generated. A T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to

Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/

Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated

and chiller will not be allowed to start. In either fault case listed

above, Pump 2 will be commanded to start once Pump 1 has

failed.

If Pump 2 starts and the auxiliary contact interlock does

not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T191 —

Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert

will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not be

allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not close

within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A T193

— Cooler Pump 2 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and

an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up

Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.

In either fault case listed above, Pump 1 will be commanded to

start once Pump 2 has failed.

If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds

after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1

Running Alert or T197 — Flow Lost While Pump 2 Running

Alert for the appropriate pump and an A201 — Cooler Flow/

Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm

will be generated and the machine will stop. If available, the

other pump will be started. If flow is proven, the machine will

be allowed to restart.

If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit

closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 – Cooler Pump and Aux

Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit will

be prevented from starting.

The control will allow for pump changeover. Two methods

will change the pump sequence. Before the changeover can

occur, the unit must be at Capacity Stage 0. During changeover

the chilled water flow switch input is ignored for 10 seconds to

avoid a nuisance alarm.

With Cooler Pump Select (ConfigurationOPT1

PM.SL) set to 0 (Automatic) and when the differential time

limit Pump Changeover Hours (ConfigurationOPT1

PM.DT) is reached, the lead pump will be turned OFF. Ap-

proximately one (1) second later, the lag pump will start. Manu-

al changeover can be accomplished by changing Rotate Cooler

Pump Now (ConfigurationOPT1ROT.P) to YES only if

the machine is at Capacity Stage 0 and the differential time limit

Pump Changeover Hours (PM.DT) is reached. If the PM.DT is

not satisfied, the changeover will not occur. With the machine at

Capacity Stage 0, the pumps would rotate automatically as part

of the normal routine.

With Cooler Pump Select (PM.SL) set to 1 (Pump 1 Starts

First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First), a manual changeover can be ac-

complished by changing PM.SL only. The machine Remote-

Off-Enable Switch must be in the OFF position to change this

variable. The Rotate Cooler Pump Now (ROT.P) feature does

not work for these configuration options.

As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pumps can be

started to maintain lubrication to the pump seal. To utilize this

function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (ConfigurationOPT1

PM.PS) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the

factory default. If feature is enabled and the pump(s) are not

operating, then the pumps will be operated every other day for

2 seconds starting at 14:00 hours. If a pump has failed and has

an active Alert condition, it will not be started that day.

Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Con-

trol — The dual chiller routine is available for the control of

two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This

control algorithm is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement

only. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the

other as the slave. An additional leaving fluid temperature

thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in

Fig. 16 and 17 and connected to the master chiller. Refer to Sen-

sors section, page 20, for wiring. The CCN communication bus

must be connected between the two chillers. Connections can be

made to the CCN screw terminals on LVT. Refer to Carrier

Comfort Network^®Interface section, page 19, for wiring infor-

mation. Configuration examples are shown in Tables 22 and 23.

Refer to Table 22 for dual chiller configuration. In this

example the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and

the slave chiller at address 2. The master and slave chillers

must reside on the same CCN bus (ConfigurationCCN

CCNB) but cannot have the same CCN address (Configu-

rationCCNCCNA). Both master and slave chillers must

have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (ConfigurationRSET

LLEN) configured to ENBL. Master/Slave Select (Config-

urationRSET MSSL) must be configured to MAST for

the master chiller and SLVE for the slave. Also in this example,

the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance

Select (ConfigurationRSETLLBL) and Lead/Lag Bal-

ance Delta (ConfigurationRSETLLBD) to even out the

chiller run-times weekly. The Lag Start Delay (Configura-

tionRSETLLDY) feature will be set to 10 minutes. This

will prevent the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller

has been at 100% capacity for the length of the delay time. Par-

allel configuration (ConfigurationRSETPARA) can

only be configured to YES. The variables LLBL, LLBD and

LLDY are not used by the slave chiller.

If the chilled water pump interlock opens for 25 seconds

after initially being closed is detected by the control, the appro-

priate T194 — Cooler Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Nor-

mal Operation Alert or T195 — Cooler Pump 2 Contacts

Opened During Normal Operation Alert is generated and the

unit is shut down. If available, the other pump will be started. If

flow is proven, the machine will be allowed to restart.

If the control detects that the chilled water flow switch

circuit is closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output

OFF, an A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump

is Off Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed

to start.

If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary

contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is

OFF, the appropriate T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts

Closed While Pump Off or Alert T199 — Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Closed While Pump Off Alert is generated. The

chiller will not be allowed to start.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example)

SUB-MODE

DISP

ITEM

KEYPAD ENTRY

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

COMMENTS

UNIT

OPT1

ENTER

ESCAPE

CTRL

CONTROL METHOD

SWITCH

OPT2

CTRL

DEFAULT 0

OPT2

CCN

CCNA

CCNB

ENTER

CCN ADDRESS

DEFAULT 1

DEFAULT 0

CCNB

CCN

ENTER

CCN BUS NUMBER

ESCAPE

CCN

RSET

CRST

LLEN

DSBL

ENBL

LLEN

MSSL

MAST

MSSL

SLVA

PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RESET

ENTER

COOLING RESET TYPE

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

15 ITEMS

SCROLLING STOPS

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT ENBL

LLEN

MSSL

SLVA

LLBL

ENTER

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

CHANGE ACCEPTED

ESCAPE

MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

ENTER

DEFAULT MAST

ESCAPE

RSET

SLAVE ADDRESS

ENTER

SCROLLING STOPS

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 2

ENTER

SLAVE ADDRESS

CHANGE ACCEPTED

ESCAPE

SLVA

LLBL

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

ENTER

SCROLLING STOPS

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 2 - Automatic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

KEYPAD ENTRY

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

COMMENTS

LLBL

ENTER

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

CHANGE ACCEPTED

ESCAPE

LLBL

LLBD

168

LLBD

LLDY

LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LLBD

LLDY

PARA

ENTER

DEFAULT 168

ESCAPE

LAG START DELAY

RSET

ENTER

SCROLLING STOPS

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 10

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

LAG START DELAY

CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLDY

RSET

YES

MASTER COMPLETE

NOTES:

1. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch, 2-Occupancy or 3-CCN.

2. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.

Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configura-

tion of Control Method (ConfigurationOPT1CTRL) of

the Master chiller. The Slave chiller should always be config-

ured for CTRL=0 (Switch). If the chillers are to be controlled

by Remote Contacts, both Master and Slave chillers should be

enabled together. Two separate relays or one relay with

two sets of contacts may control the chillers. The Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch should be in the Remote Contact

position on both the Master and Slave chillers. The Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch should be in the Enable position for

CTRL=2 (Occupancy) or CTRL=3 (CCN Control).

DIMENSIONS in. (mm)

PART

NUMBER

10HB50106801

10HB50106802

3.10 (78.7)

4.10 (104.1)

1.55 (39.4)

1.28 (32.5)

0.505/0.495

0.61

DIA

Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency

Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master

chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode.

If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is

generated on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in

a Stand-Alone mode.

The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its

Control Mode (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) and its operat-

ing setpoint or Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCT.PT).

6” MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

1/4 N.P.T.

Fig. 17 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well

Temperature Reset — The control system is capable of

handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler

fluid temperature. Because the change in temperature through

the cooler is a measure of the building load, the return tempera-

ture reset is in effect an average building load reset method.

The control system is also capable of temperature reset based

on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or

from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. Accessory sen-

sors must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The energy

management module (EMM) must be used for temperature

reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Tables 24 and 25.

THERMISTOR

WIRING*

LEAVING

FLUID

MASTER

CHILLER

RETURN

FLUID

SLAVE

CHILLER

INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT

LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE

THERMISTOR (T10) HERE

*Depending on piping sizes, use either:

• HH79NZ014 sensor/10HB50106801 well (3-in. sensor/well)

• HH79NZ029 sensor/10HB50106802 well (4-in. sensor/well)

Fig. 16 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 23 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example)

SUB-MODE

DISP

ITEM

KEYPAD ENTRY

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

COMMENTS

UNIT

OPT1

ENTER

CTRL

CONTROL METHOD

SWITCH

OPT2

CTRL

DEFAULT 0

ESCAPE

OPT2

CCN

CCNA

ENTER

CCN ADDRESS

SCROLLING STOPS

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT 2

(SEE NOTE 1)

CCN

CCNA

CCNB

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

CCN ADDRESS

CHANGE ACCEPTED

CCN

DEFAULT 0

(SEE NOTE 2)

CCN BUS NUMBER

ESCAPE

CCN

RSET

CRST

LLEN

DSBL

ENBL

LLEN

MSSL

MAST

SLVE

MSSL

RSET

PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RSET

ENTER

COOLING RESET TYPE

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

15 ITEMS

SCROLLING STOPS

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT ENBL

LLEN

MSSL

ENTER

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

CHANGE ACCEPTED

ESCAPE

RSET

ENTER

SCROLLING STOPS

VALUE FLASHES

SELECT SLVE

ENTER

ESCAPE

MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

CHANGE ACCEPTED

SLAVE COMPLETE

NOTES:

1. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0.

2. Slave CCN Address (CCNA) must be different than Master.

3. Slave CCN Bus Number (CCNB) must be the same as Master

4. Slave does not require SLVA, LLBL, LLBD, or LLDY to be configured.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 24 — 4 to 20 mA Reset

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

SUB-MODE

RSET

ITEM

COMMENT

EXPANSION

0 = no reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA input

2 = Outdoor air temp

3 = Return Fluid

COOLING RESET

ENTER

CRST

TYPE

4 = Space Temperature

5.0 F

(2.8 C)

DEGREES COOL

RESET

Default: 0° F (0° C) Reset at 20 mA

Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

MA.DG

NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4 to 20 mA reset. No reset will

occur at 4.0 mA input, and a 5.0 F reset will occur at 20.0 mA. An EMM is required.

Table 25 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

EXPANSION

SUB-MODE

DISP

ITEM

DISPLAY

COMMENT

ENTER

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET

DMDC

SLCT

CONFIGURATION

ENTER

CLSP

COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

Scrolling Stops

Flashing ‘0’

Select ‘4’

ENTER

Change Accepted

be configured for the type of reset desired. The variable

RM.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset should

occur. The variable RM.F should be set to the temperature that

maximum reset is to occur. The variable RM.DG should be set

to the maximum amount of reset desired. Figures 18 and 19 are

examples of outdoor air and space temperature resets.

To use return reset, four variables must be configured. In the

Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET, items CRST,

RT.NO, RT.F and RT.DG must be properly set. See Table 26B

— Configuring Return Temperature Reset. This example pro-

vides 5.0 F (2.8 C) chilled water set point reset at 2.0 F (1.1 C)

cooler T and 0° F (0° C) reset at 10.0 F (5.6 C) cooler T. The

variable RT.NO should be set to the cooler temperature differ-

ence (T) where no chilled water temperature reset should oc-

cur. The variable RT.F should be set to the cooler temperature

difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset

should occur. The variable RM.DG should be set to the maxi-

mum amount of reset desired.

IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with

other control systems due to possible power supply differ-

ences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Con-

nection of control devices with different power supplies

may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink™ controls

incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A

signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal gen-

erator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

To use outdoor air or space temperature reset, four variables

must be configured. In the Configuration mode under the sub-

mode RSET, items (ConfigurationOPT1CRST), (Con-

figurationOPT1RM.NO),

(ConfigurationOPT1

RM.F), and (ConfigurationOPT1RT.DG) must be

properly set. See Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and

Space Temperature Reset. The outdoor air reset example pro-

vides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0 F (29.4 C)

outdoor-air temperature and 15.0 F (8.3 C) reset at 55.0 F

(12.8 C) outdoor-air temperature. The space temperature reset

example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at

72.0 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6.0 F (3.3 C) reset at

68.0 F (20.0 C) space temperature. The variable CRST should

To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run

Status mode, sub-mode VIEW, and subtract the active set point

(Run StatusVIEWSETP) from the control point (Run

StatusVIEWCTPT) to determine the degrees reset.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset

DISPLAY

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-

MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

EXPANSION

ITEM

COMMENT

Outdoor

Air

Space

ENTER

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

CONFIGURATION

2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature

4 = Space Temperature

(Connect to TB5-5,6)

COOLING RESET

TYPE

RSET

CRST

ENTER

REMOTE - NO

RESET TEMP

Default: 125.0 F (51.7 C)

Range: 0° to125 F

RM.NO*

RM.F

85 °F

55 °F

72 °F

68 °F

REMOTE - FULL

RESET TEMP

Default: 0.0° F (-17.7 C)

Range: 0° to 125 F

Default: 0° F (0° C)

Range: –30 to 30 F

(–34.4 to -1.1 °C)

REMOTE - DEGREES

RESET

RM.DG

15 °F

6 °F

*4 items skipped in this example.

Table 26B — Configuring Return Temperature Reset

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

SUB-MODE

DISP

ITEM DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

ENTER

TEST

TYPE

FLUD

CTRL

ON/OFF

TEST DISPLAY LEDs

UNIT TYPE

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

HP.A

COOLER FLUID

CONTROL METHOD

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

CONFIGURATION

0 = No Reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required)

(Connect to EMM TB6-2,3)

RSET

CRST

COOLING RESET TYPE 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature

3 = Return Fluid

ENTER

4 = Space Temperature

(Connect to TB5-5,6)

RETURN FLUID - NO

RESET TEMP

Default: 10.0 F (5.6 C)

Range: 0° to10 F COOLER T

RT.NO* 10.0 F

RETURN FLUID - FULL Default: 0 F (–17.8 C)

RT.F

0.0 F

RESET TEMP

Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER T

RETURN - DEGREES

RESET

Default: 0 F (0 C)

Range: –30 to 30°F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

RT.DG

10.0 F

*4 items skipped in this example.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant

leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled

fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the entering cooler

fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 20.

Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point

are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the flu-

id temperature set point may be colder than required. If the

leaving fluid temperature was allowed to increase at part load,

the efficiency of the machine would increase.

Return temperature reset allows for the leaving temperature

set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid

temperature or, in effect, the building load.

Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows

the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy us-

age. There are 3 types of demand limiting that can be config-

ured. The first type is through 2-stage switch control, which will

reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentag-

es. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will re-

duce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA

input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level

at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed

module and has the ability to limit the current operating capaci-

ty to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required.

LEGEND

EWT — Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature

LWT

—

Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 20 — Standard Chilled Fluid

Temperature Control — No Reset

To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to

use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the

type selected.

NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20-mA input sig-

nal types of demand limiting require the energy management

module (EMM).

DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To con-

figure demand limit for 2-stage switch control set the Demand

Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 1. Then

configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (Configura-

tionRSETDLS1) and (ConfigurationRSETDLS2)

to the desired capacity limit. See Table 27. Capacity steps are

controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to TB6 as shown

in Fig. 6 and 7.

For demand limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the first

stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand

limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity

entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point (DLS1). Closing

contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit

from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch

2 set point. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest de-

mand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If

the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging, the

unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.

LEGEND

To disable demand limit configure DMDC to 0. See

Table 27.

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 18 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset

EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to

20 mA Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20

mA control set the Demand Limit Select (Configura-

tionRSETDMDC) to 2. Then configure the Demand

Limit at 20 mA (ConfigurationRSETDM20) to the

maximum loadshed value desired. Connect the output from an

externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block TB6,

terminals 1 and 5. Refer to the unit wiring diagram for these

connections to the optional/accessory energy management

module and terminal block. The control will reduce allowable

capacity to this level for the 20 mA signal. See Table 27 and

Fig. 21.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-

turer’s control systems, due to possible power supply

differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.

The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.

ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A sig-

nal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge

signal generating device is used.

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 19 — Space Temperature Reset

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To con-

figure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the De-

mand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 3.

Then configure the Loadshed Group Number (Configura-

tionRSETSHNM), Loadshed Demand Delta (Configu-

rationRSETSHDL), and Maximum Loadshed Time

(ConfigurationRSETSHTM). See Table 27.

The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN

system designer. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a

Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the

Redline command is received, the current stage of capacity is

set to the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed con-

trol send a Loadshed command, the ComfortLink controls will

reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed

Demand delta. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the maximum

length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist. The

control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no

Cancel command has been received within the configured

maximum loadshed time limit.

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) — A field supplied

and generated, externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal can be

used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set point. Connect

the signal to LVT7,8 (+,–). See Table 27 for instructions to

enable the function. Figure 22 shows how the 4 to 20 mA sig-

nal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F range for

fluid types (ConfigurationOPT1FLUD) 1 or 2. The set

point will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. Be sure that the

chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature.

100

50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA

100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA

75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA

DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 - 20 mA INPUT

Fig. 21 — 4 to 20-mA Demand Limiting

100

(38)

(32)

(27)

(21)

MAXIMUM

SET POINT

70 F (21.1 C)

(15)

(10)

(4.4)

(FLUD = 1) MINIMUM

SET POINT 38 F (3.3 C)

(-1)

(-7)

(FLUD = 2) MINIMUM

SET POINT 14 F (-10 C)

(-12)

(-17)

6.3

8.6

10.9

13.1

15.4

17.7

4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO EMM

EMM — Energy Management Module

Fig. 22 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 27 — Configuring Demand Limit

KEYPAD

ENTRY

KEYPAD

MODE

SUB-MODE

DISP

ITEM

TEST

TYPE

FLUD

CTRL

DISPLAY

ITEM EXPANSION

Test Display LEDs

Unit Type

COMMENT

ENTRY

CONFIGURATION

ENTER

ON/OFF

ENTER

UNIT

OPT1

Cooler Fluid

OPT2

Control Method

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET

ENTER

CRST

Cooling Reset Type

Demand Limit Select

Demand Limit at 20 mA

Default: 0

0 = None

DMDC*

1 = Switch

2 = 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = CCN Loadshed

Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100

DM20

SHNM

SHDL

SHTM

DLS1

DLS2

XXX %

XXX

Loadshed Group

Number

Default: 0

Range: 0 to 99

Loadshed Demand

Delta

Default: 0%

Range: 0 to 60%

XXX%

XXX MIN

XXX %

Maximum Loadshed

Time

Default: 60 min.

Range: 0 to 120 min.

Demand Limit

Switch 1

Default: 80%

Range: 0 to 100%

Demand Limit

Switch 2

Default: 50%

Range: 0 to 100%

*Seven items skipped in this example.

(DTT) is installed along with the AUX board for control of the

DUS.

Digital Scroll Option — The 30RAP units have a

factory-installed option for a digital scroll compressor which

provides additional stages of unloading for the unit. The digital

compressor is always installed in the A1 compressor location.

When a digital compressor is installed, a digital unloader sole-

noid (DUS) is used on the digital compressor.

DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION — A digital scroll oper-

ates in two stages - the "loaded state" when the solenoid valve

is normally closed and the "unloaded state" when the solenoid

valve is open. During the loaded state, the compressor operates

like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and mass flow.

DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION — When a

digital compressor is installed, the configuration parameter

(ConfigurationUNITA1TY) is configured to YES.

There is also a maximum unload time configuration, (Config-

urationUNITMAX.T) that is set to 7 seconds, which in-

dicates the maximum unloading for the digital compressor is

47%. This is done to optimize efficiency of the system.

PRE-START-UP

However, during the unloaded state, there is no capacity

and no mass flow through the compressor. The capacity of the

system is varied by varying the time the compressor operates

in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second period. If

the DUS is energized for 7 seconds, the compressor will be

operating at 47% capacity. If the DUS is energized for 10 sec-

onds, the compressor will be operating at approximately 33%

of its capacity. Capacity is the time averaged summation of

loaded and unloaded states, and its range is continuous from

the minimum configured capacity to 100%. Regardless of

capacity, the compressor always rotates with constant speed.

As the compressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state,

the discharge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the com-

pressor sound will change.

IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,

complete Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chiller at

end of this publication (pages CL-1 to CL-10). The check-

list assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record

of unit condition, application requirements, system infor-

mation, and operation at initial start-up.

Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks

have been completed.

System Check

1. Check all auxiliary components, such as chilled fluid

pumps, air-handling equipment, or other equipment to

which the chiller supplies liquid. Consult manufacturer's

instructions. Verify that any pump interlock contacts have

been properly installed. If the unit If the unit has

field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly in-

stalled and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.

The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates the op-

eration of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to

maintain temperature control. When a digital compressor is in-

stalled, an additional discharge gas temperature thermistor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Use the scrolling marquee display to adjust the Cooling

Set Point.

START-UP AND OPERATION

NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-10.

3. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recom-

mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to

be cooled. Bleed all air out of the high points of the sys-

tem. If chilled water is to be maintained at a temperature

below 40 F (4.4 C) or outdoor temperatures are expected

to be below 32 F (0° C), a brine of sufficient concentra-

tion must be used to prevent freeze-up at anticipated

suction temperatures. See Table 28.

Actual Start-Up — Actual start-up should be done only

under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic.

1. Be sure all service valves are open.

2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set

point (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1). No cooling range

adjustment is necessary.

3. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler

pump control).

4. Check tightness of all electrical connections.

5. Oil should be visible in the compressor sightglass(es).

See Fig. 23. An acceptable oil level in the compressors is

4. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to

ENABLE position.

from /₈to /₈of sight glass. Adjust the oil level as re-

quired. See Oil Charge section on page 50 for Carrier ap-

proved oils.

5. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is func-

tioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid tempera-

ture agrees with leaving set point (Set PointsCOOL

CSP.1) or (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2), or if reset is

used, with the control point (Run StatusVIEW

CTPT).

6. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see

that it remains well above 32 F (0° C), or the brine freez-

ing point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit.

6. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.

7. All condenser fan and factory installed hydronic package

pump motors are three phase. Check for proper rotation

of condenser fans first BEFORE attempting to start

pumps or compressors. To reverse rotation, interchange

any two of the main incoming power leads.

8. Be sure system is fully charged with refrigerant (see

Check Refrigerant Charge section on this page).

7. Recheck compressor oil level (see Oil Charge section).

9. If unit is a brine unit, check to ensure proper brine con-

centration is used to prevent freezing.

Check Refrigerant Charge — All 30RAP units are

shipped with a complete operating charge of R-410A and

should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test after

installation. If there is no system pressure, admit nitrogen until

a pressure is observed and then proceed to test for leaks. After

leaks are repaired, the system must be dehydrated.

10. Verify proper operation of cooler and hydronic package

heaters (if installed). Heaters operate at the same voltage

as the main incoming power supply and are single phase.

Heater current is approximately 0.4 amps for 460 and

575 v units. Heater current is approximately 0.8 amps for

230 v units.

All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in.

Schraeder connection on the liquid line. Do NOT add refriger-

ant charge through the low-pressure side of the system. If com-

plete charging is required, weigh in the appropriate charge for

the circuit as shown on the unit nameplate. If partial charging is

required, operate circuit at full load and use an accurate tem-

perature sensor on the liquid line as it enters the EXV. Use the

Temperatures mode on the scrolling marquee display to show

the circuit saturated condensing temperature (Tempera-

a30-4978

turesCIR.ASCT.A)

(TemperaturesCIR.B

SCT.B). Charging is most accurate at saturated discharge

temperatures of 120 to 125 F (49 to 52 C). Block condenser air-

flow as required to reach this temperature range. Add refriger-

ant until the system subcooling (SCT.A or SCT.B minus liquid

line temperature entering EXV) is approximately 15 to 17 F

(–9.4 to –8.3 C). Refrigerant VAPOR only may be added to a

circuit through the ¹/₄-in. suction Schraeder connection on the

suction line.

OIL SIGHTGLASS

Fig. 23 — Sight Glass Location

Table 28 — Minimum Cooler Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume

30RAP

SIZE

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW MINIMUM COOLER FLOW MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (gpm)

RATE (l/s)

0.8

RATE (l/s)

3.2

010

015

018

020

025

030

035

040

045

050

055

060

1.1

1.3

1.5

1.8

2.1

2.6

3.0

3.3

4.2

4.9

5.7

7.1

112

133

164

186

209

228

251

270

8.4

10.3

11.7

13.2

14.4

15.8

17.0

3.6

4.0

4.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor

where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.

To determine percent voltage imbalance:

CAUTION

max voltage deviation

Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. Do

not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge

pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power

consumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be

sure water is continuously circulating through the cooler to

prevent freezing.

from avg voltage

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

average voltage

The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference

between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average

across all 3 legs.

Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.

AB = 243 v

Operating Limitations

TEMPERATURES (See Table 29 for 30RAP standard tem-

perature limits).

BC = 236 v

AC = 238 v

CAUTION

1. Determine average voltage:

Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid)

temperature (LCWT) below 40 F (4.4 C) for the standard

units, or below 15 F (–9.4 C) for units factory built for

medium temperature brine.

243 + 236 + 238

Averagevoltage =

717

High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures

(LCWT) — During start-up with cooler LCWT above approx-

imately 60 F (16 C), the unit expansion valve will limit suction

pressure to approximately 90 psig (620 kPa) to avoid overload-

ing the compressor.

Low Cooler LCWT — For standard units, the LCWT must be

no lower than 40 F (4.4 C). If the unit is the factory-installed

optional medium temperature brine unit, the cooler LCWT can

go down to 15 F (–9.4 C).

= 239

2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:

(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v

(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v

(AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v

Maximum deviation is 4 v.

3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:

Table 29 — Temperature Limits for

Standard 30RAP Units

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

239

UNIT SIZE 30RA

Temperature

010-030

035-060

= 1.7%

This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the

maximum allowable of 2%.

Maximum Ambient

Temperature

Minimum Ambient

Temperature

Maximum Cooler EWT*

Maximum Cooler LWT

Minimum Cooler LWT†

120

IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is

more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company

immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition

is corrected.

4.4

LEGEND

Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature

LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

Control Circuit Power — Power for the control circuit is

supplied from the main incoming power through a factory-

installed control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models.

Field wiring connections are made to the LVT.

EWT

—

*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C).

†Unit requires modification below this temperature.

LOW-AMBIENT OPERATION — If operating temperatures

below 45 F (7 C) on size 018-030 units, and 32 F (0° C) on size

035-060 units are expected, accessory Motormaster® V con-

trol must be installed. Operating temperatures can go as low as

–20 F (–29 C) on size 010 and 015 units, as standard. Installa-

tion of wind baffles is also required. Refer to separate installa-

tion instructions for operation using this accessory. Contact

your Carrier representative for details.

OPERATION SEQUENCE

During unit off cycle, the control monitors the outdoor air

temperature. If the ambient temperature drops below 40 F

(4.4 C), cooler and hydronic system heaters (if either are facto-

ry installed) are energized. If power is maintained to the chiller

and the EMERGENCY ON/OFF switch is left in the OFF po-

sition, these heaters are also energized.

The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE

CONTACT switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTACT

position. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from

the internal control or CCN network command or remote con-

tact closure), the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leav-

ing fluid set point. The first compressor starts 1¹/₂to 3 minutes

after the call for cooling.

CAUTION

Brine duty application (below 40 F [4.4 C] LCWT) for

chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact

your Carrier representative for applicable LCWT range for

standard water-cooled chiller in a specific application.

The lead circuit can be specifically designated on all models

or selected based on compressor run hours and starts depend-

ing on field configuration. The unit control will override this

selection under certain starting conditions to properly maintain

oil return to the compressors. In general, on dual compressor

VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS

Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable

supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

circuits, the control will most often start the A1 or B1 compres-

sor first, especially after long off periods. The MBB controls

fan stages to maintain the head pressure set point and will auto-

matically adjust unit capacity as required to keep compressors

from operating outside of the specified envelope. There are no

pumpout or pumpdown sequences on these chillers.

For all units, if temperature reset is being used, the unit con-

trols to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load

reduces. If demand limit is used, the unit may temporarily be

unable to maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature be-

cause of imposed power limitations.

determines the saturated temperature of suction gas. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the superheated gas and the

saturated suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV board

controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper

motor to maintain superheat set point.

The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approxi-

mately 9° F (5° C). Because EXV status is communicated to

the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV

boards, it is possible to track the valve position. The unit is then

protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. Just prior to

compressor start, the EXV will open. At low ambient tempera-

tures the EXV is closed at start up. After initialization period,

valve position is tracked by the EXV board by constantly mon-

itoring the amount of valve movement.

SERVICE

The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction tem-

perature to 50 F (10 C). This makes it possible for the chiller to

start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading

the compressor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maxi-

mum operating pressure). At ambient temperatures above

110 F, MOP is bypassed at start-up to prevent charge backup in

the condenser.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut

off all power to this equipment during service. There may

be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect

locations to alert others not to restore power until work is

completed.

If it appears that the EXV module is not properly control-

ling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a

number of checks that can be made using test functions and

initialization features built into the microprocessor control. See

the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure section to test EXVs.

Electronic Components

CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced elec-

tronic control system that normally does not require service.

For details on controls refer to Operating Data section.

Access to the compressors is through latched panels from

beneath the control box on all models or from opposite the coil

side (sizes 010-030 only). The front door(s) provide access to

the compressor(s) and all components of the refrigeration sys-

tem. For size 010-030 units, access to the controls is through

the upper latched outer door above the compressor access door.

Similarly, the upper center latched door on sizes 035-060 gives

access to the controls. Inner panels are secured in place and

should not be removed unless all power to the chiller is off.

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure — Follow steps

below to diagnose and correct EXV/economizer problems.

Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/

ESCAPE

Remote Contact (EOR) switch to the Off position. Press

on the Navigator™ display until ‘Select a menu item’ appears

on the display. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test

ENTER

mode. Press

. The display will be:

> TEST

OFF

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — See Fig. 24

for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refriger-

ant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through

the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase

condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve

operates through an electronically controlled activation of a

stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless

power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator wind-

ings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on

the phase relationship of the power pulses.

The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating

movements that are transformed into linear motion by the

transmission in the cage assembly. The valve includes a posi-

tive shut-off when closed.

OUTS

COMP

ENTER

Press

(password entry may be required) and use

to change ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’. Switch the EOR switch to

Enable. The Service Test mode is now enabled. Move the

pointer down to the OUTS sub-mode and press

ENTER

. Move the

ENTER

pointer to item EXV.A or EXV.B as needed. Press

and

the valve position will flash. Use

position (hold

to select 100% valve

ENTER

for quick movement) and press

The technician should be able to feel the actuator moving by

placing a hand on the EXV. A sight glass is located on the valve

body to verify that the sleeve is moving to expose/cover slots in

the orifice. A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator

when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surround-

ings are relatively quiet). Press

There are two different EXVs. See Table 30 for number of

steps. The EXV motor moves at 200 steps per second. Com-

manding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add extra steps to

the move, to ensure the value is open or closed completely.

ENTER

again twice if necessary to

ENTER

confirm this. To close the valve, press

, select 0% with

Table 30 — EXV Steps

ENTER

and press

. The actuator should knock when it reaches

UNIT SIZE 30RAP

010-020

EXV STEPS

1596

the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not

working properly, continue with the checkout procedure

below:

025,030

2500

035-045

1596

050-060

2500

Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on

the EXV module (see Fig. 25). Connect positive test lead to red

wire (EXV-J6 terminal 3 for Circuit A, EXV-J7 terminal 3 for

Circuit B). Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the

Service Test procedure above, move the valve output under test

to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 3 to any

other pin as board damage will occur.

The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a

thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the

compressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pres-

sure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature.

The thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated

gas entering the compressor and the pressure transducer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT

CABLE

CABLE RETAINER

MOTOR AND

ADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

MOTOR ADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

CABLE

RETAINER

GASKET

MOTOR ADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

SIGHTGLASS

SPORLAN

FLOW

DIRECTION

NORMAL

FLOW

DIRECTION

a30-4971

Fig. 24 — Electronic Expansion Valve Details

During the next several seconds, carefully connect the nega-

tive test lead to pins 1,2,4 and 5 in succession (plug J6 for Cir-

cuit A, plug J7 for Circuit B). Digital voltmeters will average

this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If it remains con-

stant at a voltage other than 6 VDC or shows 0 volts, remove

the connector to the valve and recheck.

FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS — The EXV valves

on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 can be serviced. The EXV valves

on all other sizes are hermetic and cannot be disassembled for

installation or during service, however, the cable and retainer

may be replaced if necessary. Motor kits for the EXV valve are

available as replacement parts.

To remove the valve from the system, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the

circuit.

2. Disconnect the line voltage to the valve controller. Dis-

connect the valve wires from the controller.

3. If the motor fails to operate properly, check the resistance

of each motor phase. Resistance between black and white

leads or between the red and green leads should be ap-

proximately 100 ohms. Differences of more than 10% be-

tween phases indicate a defective motor. Resistance be-

tween black and red, or any lead and piping, should be in-

finite or “open”. Any resistance reading will indicate a

shorted winding and the valve will need to be replaced.

ENTER

Press

and select 0% to close the valve. Check the 4 po-

sition DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to

On). If a problem still exists, replace the EXV module. If the

reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should

be checked. Check the EXV terminal strip and interconnecting

wiring.

1. Check color coding and wire connections. Make sure

they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV

driver and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.

2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin

terminals.

3. Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Re-

move the EXV module plug (J6 for Circuit A, J7 for Cir-

cuit B) and check the resistance of the two windings be-

tween pins 1 and 2 for one winding and pins 4 and 5 for

the other winding (see Fig. 25). The resistance should be

100 ohms ± 10 ohms.

4. The output of the controller to the valve can be tested

with the following procedure:

a. Disconnect supply voltage to the controller.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTION

BLK

WHT

If the existing motor has been removed for inspection or

cleaning, be sure that the piston is fully retracted into the

motor assembly before installation on the valve. Failure to

do so will permanently damage the drive and motor.

Replacement motor assemblies are shipped in the retracted

position and may be installed as received.

GRN

RED

Compressor Replacement (Refer to Fig. 26

and 27) — All models contain scroll compressors and have

from one to four compressors. The size 010-030 units are a sin-

gle refrigeration circuit while sizes 035-060 are dual circuit. A

compressor is most easily removed from the front of the unit,

depending on where clearance space was allowed during unit

installation.

Remove the junction box cover bolts and disconnect the

compressor power and ground connections. Remove the cable

from the compressor junction box. Remove the connections

from the high-pressure switch. Knock the same holes out of the

new compressor junction box and install the cable connectors

from the old compressor.

BLK

WHT

GRN

RED

a30-4972

Fig. 25 — EXV Cable Connections to EXV Module

b. Place a digital voltmeter, on 20-volt AC scale,

across the black and white terminals on the con-

troller. Restore power to the controller. For at least

7 seconds, the voltmeter should read approxi-

mately 12 to 14 volts. Significant differences mean

the controller is defective or not properly config-

ured for the EXV valve.

c. Repeat the procedure in Step b above using the red

and green terminals on the controller. If the con-

troller responds properly, then the wiring may be

damaged or the valve may be plugged with debris

or otherwise obstructed.

The compressors are bolted to rails, which are in turn bolted

to the unit basepan for all sizes except 010 and 015 which are

directly bolted to the basepan. Remove the 4 bolts holding the

compressor to the rail on the basepan. Save the mounting hard-

ware for use with the new compressor. Carefully cut the com-

pressor suction and discharge lines with a tubing cutter as close

to the compressor as feasible. Remove high-pressure switch

and pressure transducer(s) if required for compressor removal.

Lift one corner of the compressor at a time and remove all the

rubber mounting grommets (single compressor circuits) or

steel spacers (dual compressor circuits). Remove the old com-

pressor from the unit.

Slide the new compressor in place on the basepan. Lifting

one side of the compressor at a time, replace all of the compres-

sor mounting grommets. Using new tubing as required, recon-

nect compressor suction and discharge lines. Using hardware

saved, reinstall the mounting bolts and washers through the

compressor feet. Using proper techniques, braze suction and

discharge lines and check for leaks. Reconnect oil equalization

line on dual compressor circuit models.

Reconnect the compressor power connections and high-

pressure switch wiring as on the old compressor. Refer to

Fig. 26 and 27. Following the installation of the new compres-

sor, tighten all hardware to the following specifications. (See

Table 31.)

d. The EXV valves on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 may

be disassembled for cleaning, inspection or motor

assembly replacement.

VALVE REPLACEMENT — The valve may be replaced by

unsoldering or cutting the piping. A tubing cutter must be used

to prevent creating contaminants in the piping.

VALVE REASSEMBLY — Perform the following procedure

to reassemble the EXV valve:

1. Use Service Test to open the EXV to 100%. This will re-

tract the white polyester driver/piston fully into the driver

guide. Remove power from the valve or controller.

2. Lightly oil the threads, and gasket or knife-edge on the

new motor adaptor. Carefully seat the adaptor on the

valve body or engage and tighten the lock nut if used.

Lock nuts should be torqued to approximately 45 ft-lb.

One eighth turn more than hand tight is sufficient to

achieve a leak proof seal on knife-edge joints.

Table 31 — Unit Torque Specification

FASTENER

RECOMMENDED TORQUE

Compressor Mounting

Bolts

7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)

3. After the motor is tightened, the cable should be replaced

on the valve. Care should be taken to ensure engagement

of the alignment key. Snap on the cable retainer.

Compressor Power

Connections

Compressor Ground

Terminal Connections

24 to 28 in.-lb (2.7- to 3.2 N-m)

14 to 18 in.-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m)

4. Pressurize the system and check for leaks.

5. Reapply power to the ComfortLink™ controller. Since,

during service, valve position as calculated by the con-

troller will be lost, the controller should be initialized at

least twice. In some instances, cycling power to the con-

troller will accomplish this.

Cooler

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER RE-

PLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be

repaired if they develop a leak. If a leak (refrigerant or water)

develops, the heat exchanger must be replaced. To replace a

brazed-plate heat exchanger:

1. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as

the original heat exchanger. The unit insulation covers the

manufacturer’s part number. Make sure the depths of the

replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are the

same.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the

heat exchanger.

3. Recover the refrigerant from the system, and unsolder the

refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.

Mobil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EAL Arctic 32-3MA

Uniqema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL32-3MAF

Do not reuse oil that has been drained out, or oil that has

been exposed to atmosphere.

4. Remove the old heat exchanger. The replacement heat ex-

changer is supplied fully insulated. It also includes a cool-

er heater. Use of the heater is not required unless the orig-

inal cooler contained a factory installed heater.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Con-

denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations

5. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and at-

tach the mounting bracket hardware to the fan uprights

(sizes 010-030) or to the bottom bracket (sizes 035-060)

using the hardware removed in Step 4. Reconnect the

cooler heater if required. For sizes 010-025, torque the

bolts to 7-10 ft-lb. For sizes 030-060, torque the bolts to

30-50 ft-lb.

6. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on

the heat exchanger. Lines should be soldered using silver

as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver.

Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under nor-

mal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the cop-

per solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from chang-

ing its structure. Failure to do so can result in internal

or external leakage at the connections which cannot be re-

paired. Braze the liquid lines with a heat sink around the

expansion valve to protect it from excess heat.

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser

coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage

the coil.

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain

proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and

removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the

coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should

be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the

coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and

brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety-

glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and

gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

7. Reconnect the water/brine lines.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or

industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens-

er coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for clean-

ing condenser coils.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and

uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray

straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 de-

gree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the

core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent

damage to air centers.

8. Dehydrate and recharge the unit. Check for leaks.

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER

CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers must be

cleaned chemically. A professional cleaning service skilled in

chemical cleaning should be used. Use a weak acid (5% phos-

phoric acid, or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently, 5%

oxalic acid). Pump the cleaning solution through the

exchanger, preferably in a backflush mode. After cleaning,

rinse with large amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the

acid. Cleaning materials must be disposed of properly.

The factory-installed strainer screen in front of the water/

brine inlets of the heat exchangers should be cleaned periodi-

cally, depending on condition of the chiller water/brine.

CAUTION

Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between

air centers and refrigerant tubes.

Oil Charge

Check Refrigerant Feed Components

CAUTION

FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to main-

tain a clean, dry system. The moisture indicator (described

below) indicates any need to change the filter drier. The filter

drier is a sealed-type drier. When the drier needs to be

changed, the entire filter drier must be replaced.

NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have 1 filter drier per

circuit.

The compressor in a Puron^®refigerant (R-410A) system

uses a polyol ester (POE) oil. This is extremely hygro-

scopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can

absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for

HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Take all necessary precau-

tions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. Failure

to do so could result in possible equipment damage.

MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR —The indicator is located

immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the

refrigerant moisture content. It also provides a sight glass for

refrigerant liquid. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit

loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles in the

sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged system

or the presence of noncondensables. Moisture in the system,

measured in parts per million (ppm), changes the color of the

indicator as follows:

Green (safe) —Moisture is below 75 ppm

Yellow-Green (caution) — 75 to 150 ppm

Yellow (wet) — above 150 ppm

The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the

moisture indicator gives an accurate reading, and must be in

contact with liquid refrigerant. At the first sign of moisture in

the system, change the corresponding filter drier.

Puron refrigerant systems use a polyol ester (POE) oil. Use

only Carrier approved compressor oil. Oil should be visible in

compressor oil sight glass. An acceptable oil level is from ¹/₈to

³/₈of sight glass. All compressors must be off when checking

oil level. Recommended oil level adjustment method is as

follows:

ADD OIL — Recover charge from the unit. Add oil to suction

line Schrader valve on tandem compressors sets and the com-

pressor Schrader on the trio's and single compressor circuits.

(See Fig. 26 and 27.) When oil can be seen at the bottom of the

sight glass, add oil in 5 oz increments which is approximately

¹/₈in oil level. Run all compressors for 20 minutes then shut off

to check oil level. Repeat procedure until acceptable oil level is

present.

NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Approved

sources are:

NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have one indicator

per circuit.

Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3MAF POE, P903-1601

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DPT HPS

SUCTION

ACCESS

EWT VALVE

SPT

RGT

COMPRESSOR A2

COMPRESSOR A1

LWT

DTT

a30-4973

a30-4974

FLOW

SWITCH

Fig. 26 — Compressor Location — 30RAP010-030

SPT RGT

SUCTION

RGT

SPT

ACCESS

VALVE

HPS

DPT

DISCHARGE

ACCESS

VALVE

EWT

DTT

OIL

SIGHTGLASS

LWT

DISCHARGE

ACCESS

DPT

FLOW

SWITCH

VALVE

HPS

Fig. 27 — Compressor Location — 30RAP035-060

LEGEND FOR FIG. 26 AND 27

DPT

DTT

EWT

HPS

LWT

RGT

SPT

— Discharge Pressure Thermostat

— Discharge Temperature Thermistor

— Entering Water Thermistor

— High Pressure Switch

— Leaving Water Thermistor

— Return Gas Thermistor

— Suction Pressure Transducer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the

factory-installed capacity reduction option, a solenoid valve

and discharge bypass valve (minimum load valve) are located

between the discharge line and the cooler entering-refrigerant

line. The MBB cycles the solenoid to perform minimum load

valve function and the discharge bypass valve modulates to the

suction pressure set point and the valve.

The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the mini-

mum load valve is not adjustable. The total unit capacity with

the minimum load valve is shown in Table 19.

HEATER CABLE — Optional factory-installed cooler and/or

hydronic package heaters are cycled based on the input from

the outside-air temperature sensor. These heaters, when in-

stalled, are designed to protect the cooler and/or hydronic pack-

age from freezing down to –20 F (–29 C). Power for these heat-

ers is supplied from the main unit power.

The input from the low pressure transducer provides a back-

up cooler freeze protection package. The MBB shuts down the

unit when a low pressure condition exists that could cause the

cooler to freeze up.

PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pres-

sure relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which re-

lieves at 210 F (100 C).

CAUTION

Do not disconnect main unit power when servicing com-

pressor(s) if ambient temperature is below 40 F (4.4 C).

The compressors have either a single circuit breaker or

multiple circuit breakers which can be used to shut off

power to the compressors. If power to the unit must be off

for a prolonged period, drain the cooler, hydronic package

(if installed) and internal piping. Add glycol according to

Winter Shutdown Step 2 below.

Check Unit Safeties

HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is

provided to protect each compressor and refrigeration system

from unsafe high pressure conditions. See Table 32 for high-

pressure switch settings.

The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of

each circuit. If an unsafe, high-pressure condition should exist,

the switch opens and shuts off the affected circuit. The CSB

senses the compressor feedback signal and generates an appro-

priate alarm. The MBB prevents the circuit from restarting un-

til the alert condition is reset. The switch should open at the

pressure corresponding to the appropriate switch setting as

shown in Table 32.

WINTER SHUTDOWN — At the end of the cooling season:

1. Drain the fluid from the cooler, hydronic package (if in-

stalled) and internal piping.

2. Fill the cooler and hydronic package with at least 2 gal-

lons (7.6 L) of inhibited propylene glycol or other suit-

able inhibited antifreeze solution to prevent any residual

water in the cooler and hydronic package/piping from

freezing.

Table 32 — Factory Settings, High-Pressure

Switch (Fixed)

CUTOUT

CUT-IN

3. At the beginning of the next cooling season, refill the

cooler and add the recommended inhibitor.

UNIT

30RA

Psig

650

kPa

4482

Psig

500

kPa

3447

Thermistors — Electronic control uses up to five 5 k

thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of

the chiller. Thermistors EWT, LWT, RGTA, RGTB, and OAT

are identical in their temperature and voltage drop perfor-

mance. The SPT space temperature thermistor has a 10 k in-

put channel and it has a different set of temperature vs. resis-

tance and voltage drop performance. Resistance at various tem-

peratures are listed in Tables 33-37. For dual chiller operation,

a dual chiller sensor is required which is a 5 k thermistor.

When a digital compressor is used, a DTT (digital temperature

thermistor) is used. The DTT is an 86 k thermistor.

REPLACING THERMISTORS (EWT, LWT, RGT) — Add

a small amount of thermal conductive grease to the thermistor

well and end of probe. For all probes, tighten the retaining nut

¼ turn past finger tight. See Fig. 28.

THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A

high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this

check.

Clear the alarm using the scrolling marquee display as de-

scribed on page 63. The unit should restart after the compressor

anti-short-cycle delay, built into the unit control module,

expires.

PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is

equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer.

These inputs to the MBB are not only used to monitor the sta-

tus of the unit, but to also maintain operation of the chiller

within the compressor manufacturer's specified limits. The in-

put to the MBB from the suction pressure transducer is also

used to protect the compressor from operating at low pressure

conditions and low superheat conditions. In some cases, the

unit may not be able to run at full capacity. The control module

will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as needed to

maintain specified maximum/minimum operating pressures.

COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate the-

mistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base

Board (see Fig. 29).

2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor tem-

perature from Tables 33-37.

3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at

probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type tem-

perature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to

avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading.

Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature

determined from thermistor voltage reading should be

close, ± 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermo-

couple and taking readings.

WARNING

On medium temperature brine units, the anti-freeze solu-

tion must be properly mixed to prevent freezing at a tem-

perature of at least 15 F (8.3 C) below the leaving-fluid

temperature set point. Failure to provide the proper anti-

freeze solution mixture is considered abuse and may impair

or otherwise negatively impact the Carrier warranty.

The main base board (MBB) monitors leaving fluid temper-

ature at all times. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of ca-

pacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the

rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow.

If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down

and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature

(freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage

drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by deter-

mining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor

When the cooler is exposed to lower ambient temperatures

(34 F [1° C] or below), freeze-up protection is required using

inhibited ethylene or propylene glycol.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the

value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the

scrolling marquee display.

necessary, build-up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common

vinegar cleansing agent.

The flow sensor cable is provided with (3) LEDs that indi-

cate if 24 vac power is present and also status of the switch

contacts. The LEDs are as follows:

• Green LED ON – 24 vac present

• One Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch OPEN

• Two Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch CLOSED

Pressure Transducers — The suction and discharge

transducers are different part numbers and can be distinguished

by the color of the transducer body, suction (yellow) and dis-

charge (red). No pressure transducer calibration is required.

The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply, which is generated

by the main base board (MBB). See Fig. 29 for transducer con-

nections to the J8 connector on the MBB.

If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the

steps below to correct the situation:

TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of be-

ing faulty, first check supply voltage to the transducer. Supply

voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is correct,

compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling marquee

display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure

gauge. Pressure readings should be within ± 15 psig. If the

two readings are not reasonably close, replace the pressure

transducer.

1. Check to confirm that the factory installed strainer is

clean. Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the

screen and clean it. For the case of VFD controlled

pumps, ensure that the minimum speed setting has not

been changed.

2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler or cooler/

pump system and compare this to the system requirements.

3. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter-

minal block are secure.

4. For factory-installed hydronic systems, verify that:

• All air has been purged from the system.

• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.

5. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not

providing sufficient flow.

6. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise

when viewed from motor end of pump.

Chilled Water Flow Switch — A factory-installed

flow switch is installed in the leaving fluid piping for all units

without the factory-installed hydronic package. See Fig. 30.

Units with the optional hydronic package have the flow switch

installed in the entering fluid piping. This is a thermal-disper-

sion flow switch with no field adjustments. The switch is set

for approximately 0.5 ft/sec of flow. The sensor tip houses two

thermistors and a heater element. One thermistor is located in

the sensor tip, closest to the flowing fluid. This thermistor is

used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The

second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is af-

fected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. The

thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall

of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated

from each other within the confines of the probe.

In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the

thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the

probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried

away from the sensor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a

function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing

liquid.

Strainer — Periodic factory-installed strainer cleaning is

required. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi

(21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. Normal (clean) pres-

sure drop is approximately 1 psi (6.9 kPa). Open the factory-

installed blowdown valve to clean the strainer. If required, shut

the chiller down and remove the strainer screen to clean. When

strainer has been cleaned, enter ‘YES’ for Strainer Mainte-

nance Done (Run StatusPMS.T.MN).

Condenser Fans — Each fan is supported by a formed

wire mount bolted to a fan deck and covered with a wire guard.

METAL FANS — The exposed end of fan motor shaft is pro-

tected from weather by grease and a rubber boot. If fan motor

must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to re-

grease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. For proper perfor-

mance with the value sound fan option, fan web should be

0.32 in. (8 mm) below top of orifice on the fan deck to top of

the fan hub. (See Fig. 31.) Tighten set screws to 15 ± 1 ft-lb

(20 ± 1.3 N-m).

The difference in temperature between the two thermistors

provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe.

When fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away

from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will

be small. As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken

from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in tem-

perature differential.

When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then

the output is switched on, sending 24 vac to the MBB to prove

flow has been established.

For recommended maintenance, check the sensor tip for

build-up every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (clockwise

when viewed from above). If necessary, switch any

2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

5/8 in. HEX

1/4-18 NPT

6" MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

Fig. 28 — Thermistor Well

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 33 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

1.982

1.956

1.930

1.905

1.879

1.854

1.829

1.804

1.779

1.754

1.729

1.705

1.681

1.656

1.632

1.609

1.585

1.562

1.538

1.516

1.493

1.470

1.448

1.426

1.404

1.382

1.361

1.340

1.319

1.298

1.278

1.257

1.237

1.217

1.198

1.179

1.160

1.141

1.122

1.104

1.086

1.068

1.051

1.033

1.016

0.999

0.983

0.966

0.950

0.934

0.918

0.903

0.888

0.873

0.858

0.843

0.829

0.815

0.801

0.787

0.774

0.761

0.748

0.735

0.723

0.710

0.698

0.686

0.674

0.663

0.651

0.640

0.629

0.618

0.608

0.597

0.587

0.577

0.567

0.557

0.548

0.538

0.529

0.520

7,686

7,665

7,468

7,277

7,091

6,911

6,735

6,564

6,399

6,238

6,081

5,929

5,781

5,637

5,497

5,361

5,229

5,101

4,976

4,855

4,737

4,622

4,511

4,403

4,298

4,196

4,096

4,000

3,906

3,814

3,726

3,640

3,556

3,474

3,395

3,318

3,243

3,170

3,099

3,031

2,964

2,898

2,835

2,773

2,713

2,655

2,597

2,542

2,488

2,436

2,385

2,335

2,286

2,239

2,192

2,147

2,103

2,060

2,018

1,977

1,937

1,898

1,860

1,822

1,786

1,750

1,715

1,680

1,647

1,614

1,582

1,550

1,519

1,489

1,459

1,430

1,401

1,373

1,345

1,318

1,291

1,265

1,240

1,214

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

0.511

0.502

0.494

0.485

0.477

0.469

0.461

0.453

0.445

0.438

0.430

0.423

0.416

0.408

0.402

0.395

0.388

0.381

0.375

0.369

0.362

0.356

0.350

0.344

0.339

0.333

0.327

0.322

0.317

0.311

0.306

0.301

0.296

0.291

0.286

0.282

0.277

0.272

0.268

0.264

0.259

0.255

0.251

0.247

0.243

0.239

0.235

0.231

0.228

0.224

0.220

0.217

0.213

0.210

0.206

0.203

0.200

0.197

0.194

0.191

0.188

0.185

0.182

0.179

0.176

0.173

0.171

0.168

0.165

0.163

0.160

0.158

0.155

0.153

0.151

0.148

0.146

0.144

0.142

0.140

0.138

0.135

0.133

1,190

1,165

1,141

1,118

1,095

1,072

1,050

1,029

1,007

986

965

945

925

906

887

868

850

832

815

798

782

765

750

734

719

705

690

677

663

650

638

626

614

602

591

581

570

561

551

542

533

524

516

508

501

494

487

480

473

467

461

456

450

445

439

434

429

424

419

415

410

405

401

396

391

386

382

377

372

367

361

356

350

344

338

332

325

318

311

304

297

289

282

–25

–24

–23

–22

–21

–20

–19

–18

–17

–16

–15

–14

–13

–12

–11

–10

–9

–8

–7

–6

–5

–4

–3

–2

–1

3.699

3.689

3.679

3.668

3.658

3.647

3.636

3.624

3.613

3.601

3.588

3.576

3.563

3.550

3.536

3.523

3.509

3.494

3.480

3.465

3.450

3.434

3.418

3.402

3.386

3.369

3.352

3.335

3.317

3.299

3.281

3.262

3.243

3.224

3.205

3.185

3.165

3.145

3.124

3.103

3.082

3.060

3.038

3.016

2.994

2.972

2.949

2.926

2.903

2.879

2.856

2.832

2.808

2.784

2.759

2.735

2.710

2.685

2.660

2.634

2.609

2.583

2.558

2.532

2.506

2.480

2.454

2.428

2.402

2.376

2.349

2.323

2.296

2.270

2.244

2.217

2.191

2.165

2.138

2.112

2.086

2.060

2.034

2.008

98,010

94,707

91,522

88,449

85,486

82,627

79,871

77,212

74,648

72,175

69,790

67,490

65,272

63,133

61,070

59,081

57,162

55,311

53,526

51,804

50,143

48,541

46,996

45,505

44,066

42,679

41,339

40,047

38,800

37,596

36,435

35,313

34,231

33,185

32,176

31,202

30,260

29,351

28,473

27,624

26,804

26,011

25,245

24,505

23,789

23,096

22,427

21,779

21,153

20,547

19,960

19,393

18,843

18,311

17,796

17,297

16,814

16,346

15,892

15,453

15,027

14,614

14,214

13,826

13,449

13,084

12,730

12,387

12,053

11,730

11,416

11,112

10,816

10,529

10,250

9,979

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

9,717

9,461

9,213

8,973

8,739

8,511

8,291

8,076

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 34 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

1.982

1.935

1.889

1.844

1.799

1.754

1.710

1.666

1.623

1.580

1.538

1.497

1.457

1.417

1.378

1.340

1.302

1.265

1.229

1.194

1.160

1.126

1.093

1.061

1.030

0.999

0.969

0.940

0.912

0.885

0.858

0.832

0.807

0.782

0.758

0.735

0.713

0.691

0.669

0.649

0.629

0.610

0.591

0.573

0.555

0.538

0.522

7,855

7,499

7,161

6,840

6,536

6,246

5,971

5,710

5,461

5,225

5,000

4,786

4,583

4,389

4,204

4,028

3,861

3,701

3,549

3,404

3,266

3,134

3,008

2,888

2,773

2,663

2,559

2,459

2,363

2,272

2,184

2,101

2,021

1,944

1,871

1,801

1,734

1,670

1,609

1,550

1,493

1,439

1,387

1,337

1,290

1,244

1,200

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

0.506

0.490

0.475

0.461

0.447

0.433

0.420

0.407

0.395

0.383

0.371

0.360

0.349

0.339

0.329

0.319

0.309

0.300

0.291

0.283

0.274

0.266

0.258

0.251

0.244

0.237

0.230

0.223

0.217

0.211

0.204

0.199

0.193

0.188

0.182

0.177

0.172

0.168

0.163

0.158

0.154

0.150

0.146

0.142

0.138

0.134

1,158

1,118

1,079

1,041

1,006

971

938

906

876

836

805

775

747

719

693

669

645

623

602

583

564

547

531

516

502

489

477

466

456

446

436

427

419

410

402

393

385

376

367

357

346

335

324

312

299

285

–32

3.705

3.687

3.668

3.649

3.629

3.608

3.586

3.563

3.539

3.514

3.489

3.462

3.434

3.406

3.376

3.345

3.313

3.281

3.247

3.212

3.177

3.140

3.103

3.065

3.025

2.985

2.945

2.903

2.860

2.817

2.774

2.730

2.685

2.639

2.593

2.547

2.500

2.454

2.407

2.360

2.312

2.265

2.217

2.170

2.123

2.076

2.029

100,260

94,165

88,480

83,170

78,125

73,580

69,250

65,205

61,420

57,875

54,555

51,450

48,536

45,807

43,247

40,845

38,592

38,476

34,489

32,621

30,866

29,216

27,633

26,202

24,827

23,532

22,313

21,163

20,079

19,058

18,094

17,184

16,325

15,515

14,749

14,026

13,342

12,696

12,085

11,506

10,959

10,441

9,949

–31

–30

–29

–28

–27

–26

–25

–24

–23

–22

–21

–20

–19

–18

–17

–16

–15

–14

–13

–12

–11

–10

–9

–8

–7

–6

–5

–4

–3

–2

–1

9,485

9,044

8,627

8,231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 35 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(For SPT)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25

–24

–23

–22

–21

–20

–19

–18

–17

–16

–15

–14

–13

–12

–11

–10

–9

–8

–7

–6

–5

–4

–3

–2

–1

4.758

4.750

4.741

4.733

4.724

4.715

4.705

4.696

4.686

4.676

4.665

4.655

4.644

4.633

4.621

4.609

4.597

4.585

4.572

4.560

4.546

4.533

4.519

4.505

4.490

4.476

4.461

4.445

4.429

4.413

4.397

4.380

4.363

4.346

4.328

4.310

4.292

4.273

4.254

4.235

4.215

4.195

4.174

4.153

4.132

4.111

4.089

4.067

4.044

4.021

3.998

3.975

3.951

3.927

3.903

3.878

3.853

3.828

3.802

3.776

3.750

3.723

3.697

3.670

3.654

3.615

3.587

3.559

3.531

3.503

3.474

3.445

3.416

3.387

3.357

3.328

3.298

3.268

3.238

3.208

3.178

3.147

3.117

3.086

3.056

3.025

196,453

189,692

183,300

177,000

171,079

165,238

159,717

154,344

149,194

144,250

139,443

134,891

130,402

126,183

122,018

118,076

114,236

110,549

107,006

103,558

100,287

97,060

94,020

91,019

88,171

85,396

82,729

80,162

77,662

75,286

72,940

70,727

68,542

66,465

64,439

62,491

60,612

58,781

57,039

55,319

53,693

52,086

50,557

49,065

47,627

46,240

44,888

43,598

42,324

41,118

39,926

38,790

37,681

36,610

35,577

34,569

33,606

32,654

31,752

30,860

30,009

29,177

28,373

27,597

26,838

26,113

25,396

24,715

24,042

23,399

22,770

22,161

21,573

20,998

20,447

19,903

19,386

18,874

18,384

17,904

17,441

16,991

16,552

16,131

15,714

15,317

2.994

2.963

2.932

2.901

2.870

2.839

2.808

2.777

2.746

2.715

2.684

2.653

2.622

2.592

2.561

2.530

2.500

2.470

2.439

2.409

2.379

2.349

2.319

2.290

2.260

2.231

2.202

2.173

2.144

2.115

2.087

2.059

2.030

2.003

1.975

1.948

1.921

1.894

1.867

1.841

1.815

1.789

1.763

1.738

1.713

1.688

1.663

1.639

1.615

1.591

1.567

1.544

1.521

1.498

1.475

1.453

1.431

1.409

1.387

1.366

1.345

1.324

1.304

1.284

1.264

1.244

1.225

1.206

1.187

1.168

1.150

1.132

1.114

1.096

1.079

1.062

1.045

1.028

1.012

0.996

0.980

0.965

0.949

0.934

0.919

0.905

14,925

14,549

14,180

13,824

13,478

13,139

12,814

12,493

12,187

11,884

11,593

11,308

11,031

10,764

10,501

10,249

10,000

9,762

9,526

9,300

9,078

8,862

8,653

8,448

8,251

8,056

7,869

7,685

7,507

7,333

7,165

6,999

6,838

6,683

6,530

6,383

6,238

6,098

5,961

5,827

5,698

5,571

5,449

5,327

5,210

5,095

4,984

4,876

4,769

4,666

4,564

4,467

4,370

4,277

4,185

4,096

4,008

3,923

3,840

3,759

3,681

3,603

3,529

3,455

3,383

3,313

3,244

3,178

3,112

3,049

2,986

2,926

2,866

2,809

2,752

2,697

2,643

2,590

2,539

2,488

2,439

2,391

2,343

2,297

2,253

2,209

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

0.890

0.876

0.862

0.848

0.835

0.821

0.808

0.795

0.782

0.770

0.758

0.745

0.733

0.722

0.710

0.699

0.687

0.676

0.666

0.655

0.645

0.634

0.624

0.614

0.604

0.595

0.585

0.576

0.567

0.558

0.549

0.540

0.532

0.523

0.515

0.507

0.499

0.491

0.483

0.476

0.468

0.461

0.454

0.447

0.440

0.433

0.426

0.419

0.413

0.407

0.400

0.394

0.388

0.382

0.376

0.370

0.365

0.359

0.354

0.349

0.343

0.338

0.333

0.328

0.323

0.318

0.314

0.309

0.305

0.300

0.296

0.292

0.288

0.284

0.279

0.275

0.272

0.268

0.264

2,166

2,124

2,083

2,043

2,003

1,966

1,928

1,891

1,855

1,820

1,786

1,752

1,719

1,687

1,656

1,625

1,594

1,565

1,536

1,508

1,480

1,453

1,426

1,400

1,375

1,350

1,326

1,302

1,278

1,255

1,233

1,211

1,190

1,169

1,148

1,128

1,108

1,089

1,070

1,052

1,033

1,016

998

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

981

964

947

931

915

900

885

870

855

841

827

814

800

787

774

762

749

737

725

714

702

691

680

670

659

649

639

629

620

610

601

592

583

574

566

557

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 36 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(For SPT)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32

–31

–30

–29

–28

–27

–26

–25

–24

–23

–22

–21

–20

–19

–18

–17

–16

–15

–14

–13

–12

–11

–10

–9

4.762

4.748

4.733

4.716

4.700

4.682

4.663

4.644

4.624

4.602

4.580

4.557

4.533

4.508

4.482

4.455

4.426

4.397

4.367

4.335

4.303

4.269

4.235

4.199

4.162

4.124

4.085

4.044

4.003

3.961

3.917

3.873

3.828

3.781

3.734

3.686

3.637

3.587

3.537

3.485

3.433

3.381

3.328

3.274

3.220

3.165

3.111

200,510

188,340

177,000

166,342

156,404

147,134

138,482

130,402

122,807

115,710

109,075

102,868

97,060

91,588

86,463

81,662

77,162

72,940

68,957

65,219

61,711

58,415

55,319

52,392

49,640

47,052

44,617

42,324

40,153

38,109

36,182

34,367

32,654

31,030

29,498

28,052

26,686

25,396

24,171

23,013

21,918

20,883

19,903

18,972

18,090

17,255

16,464

3.056

3.000

2.944

2.889

2.833

2.777

2.721

2.666

2.610

2.555

2.500

2.445

2.391

2.337

2.284

2.231

2.178

2.127

2.075

2.025

1.975

1.926

1.878

1.830

1.784

1.738

1.692

1.648

1.605

1.562

1.521

1.480

1.439

1.400

1.362

1.324

1.288

1.252

1.217

1.183

1.150

1.117

1.086

1.055

1.025

0.996

0.968

15,714

15,000

14,323

13,681

13,071

12,493

11,942

11,418

10,921

10,449

10,000

9,571

9,164

8,776

8,407

8,056

7,720

7,401

7,096

6,806

6,530

6,266

6,014

5,774

5,546

5,327

5,117

4,918

4,727

4,544

4,370

4,203

4,042

3,889

3,743

3,603

3,469

3,340

3,217

3,099

2,986

2,878

2,774

2,675

2,579

2,488

2,400

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

0.940

0.913

0.887

0.862

0.837

0.813

0.790

0.767

0.745

0.724

0.703

0.683

0.663

0.645

0.626

0.608

0.591

0.574

0.558

0.542

0.527

0.512

0.497

0.483

0.470

0.457

0.444

0.431

0.419

0.408

0.396

0.386

0.375

0.365

0.355

0.345

0.336

0.327

0.318

0.310

0.302

0.294

0.287

0.279

0.272

0.265

2,315

2,235

2,157

2,083

2,011

1,943

1,876

1,813

1,752

1,693

1,637

1,582

1,530

1,480

1,431

1,385

1,340

1,297

1,255

1,215

1,177

1,140

1,104

1,070

1,037

1,005

974

–8

–7

–6

–5

944

–4

915

–3

889

–2

861

–1

836

811

787

764

742

721

700

680

661

643

626

609

592

576

561

Table 37 — 86K Thermistor vs Resistance (DTT)

TEMP

(C)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

TEMP

(C)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

-40

-31

-22

-13

-4

2,889,600

2,087,220

1,522,200

1,121,440

834,720

627,280

475,740

363,990

280,820

218,410

171,170

135,140

107,440

86,000

167

176

185

194

203

212

221

230

239

248

257

266

275

284

293

302

311

320

329

338

347

356

12,730

10,790

9,200

7,870

6,770

5,850

5,090

4,450

3,870

3,350

2,920

2,580

2,280

2,020

1,800

1,590

1,390

1,250

1,120

1,010

920

-35

-30

-25

-20

-15

-10

-5

100

105

110

115

120

125

130

135

140

145

150

155

160

165

170

175

180

69,280

56,160

104

113

122

131

140

158

45,810

37,580

30,990

25,680

21,400

15,070

830

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOW SOUND FAN — A shroud and a wire guard provide

protection from the rotating fan. The exposed end of the fan

motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If fan motor

must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to re-

grease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. The fan motor has a

step in the motor shaft. For proper performance, fan should be

positioned such that it is securely seated on this step. Tighten

the bolt to 15 ± 1 ft-lb (20 ± 1.3 N·m).

RGTA

RGTB

RED

BLK

RED

LVT

T55

BLK

BLU

RED

J12

T-55

ACCSY

SEN

OAT

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counter-

clockwise when viewed from above). If necessary, switch

any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

SPACE TEMPERATURE

ACCESSORY OR

DUAL CHILLER LWT

BLK

Motormaster^®V Controller — The Motormaster V

controller is standard on size 010 and 015 units. For other sizes,

the optional or accessory Motormaster V controller uses an in-

put signal from the AUX board. See Fig. 32. The controller is

factory configured and requires no field programming. If a situ-

ation arises where the drive does not function properly, the in-

formation provided below and in Table 38 can be used to trou-

bleshoot the drive.

EVAPORATOR ENTERING

FLUID TEMP

RED

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR LEAVING

FLUID TEMP

BLK

RED

DPTB

GRN

BLK

RED

WARNING

SPTB

DPTA

SPTA

GRN

BLK

Hazard of electrical shock. Wait three minutes after discon-

necting incoming power before servicing drive. Capacitors

retain charge after power is removed. Drive assembly

includes externally mounted current limiting resistors. Use

extreme caution when servicing the drive. Failure to com-

ply could result in possible personal injury.

RED

GRN

BLK

RED

GRN

BLK

a30-4975

WARNING

LEGEND

ACCSY — Accessory

When configured as shown in this literature, this equip-

ment is designed to start when it receives line power.

Ensure that all personnel are clear of fans and guards are

installed before applying power. Failure to comply could

result in possible personal injury.

DPT

LWT

LVT

OAT

RGT

SEN

SPT

— Discharge Pressure Transducer

— Leaving Water Temperature Sensor

— Low Voltage Terminal

— Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor

— Return Gas Temperature Sensor

— Sensor Terminal Block

— Space Temperature Sensor

CAUTION

Fig. 29 — Thermistor Connections to

Main Base Board, J8 Connector

DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals

T1, T2, and T3. Severe damage to the drive will result. Do

not continuously cycle input power to the drive more than

once every two minutes. Damage to the drive will result.

CAUTION

If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period

of time exceeding three years (due to storage, etc.), the

electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive can change

internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can

result in premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is

operated after such a long period of inactivity or storage. In

order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for

operation after a long period of inactivity, apply input

power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating

the motor. Before attempting to operate the drive, motor,

and driven equipment, be sure all procedures pertaining to

installation and wiring have been properly followed. Fail-

ure to comply could result in equipment damage.

a30-499

Fig. 30 — Chilled Water Flow Switch

GENERAL OPERATION — The speed varies in proportion

to a 4 to 20 mA signal produced by the ComfortLink™ con-

trols. The MMV output speed is displayed in Hz.

The ComfortLink controls must be configured for MMV

operation in order for it to operate. This is configured under the

Configuration menu (ConfigurationMMMMR.S) and

a30-4976

Fig. 31 — Mounted Fan Position

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

selecting “YES”. This configuration menu also contains the

gains and minimum speed for the Motormaster control logic.

VFD. It should not be removed with power applied to the

VFD.

CONFIGURATION — The MMV is configured for 1 of 12

operation modes based on the inputs to the control terminal

block. The 30RAP units use operating modes 5-8. In these con-

figurations, the MMV follows a 4 to 20 mA speed reference

signal present on terminals 25 (+) and 2 (-). One additional

jumper is required to configure the drive for 50/60 Hz opera-

tion and input voltage. See Table 39 for proper inputs. Once the

drive is powered, it will change to the mode selected according

to the inputs. See Fig. 33.

LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS — Carrier Comfort

Network^®(CCN) communications with external control

systems can be affected by high frequency electrical noise gen-

erated by the Motormaster V control. Ensure unit is well

grounded to eliminate ground currents along communication

lines.

If communications are lost only while Motormaster V con-

trol is in operation, order a signal isolator (CEAS420876-2)

and power supplies (CEAS221045-01, 2 required) for the CCN

communication line.

DRIVE PROGRAMMING

Fault Codes — The drive is programmed to automatically re-

start after a fault and will attempt to restart three times after a

fault (the drive will not restart after CF, cF, GF, F1, F2-F9, or

Fo faults). If all three restart attempts are unsuccessful, the

drive will trip into FAULT LOCKOUT (LC), which requires a

manual reset.

CAUTION

It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any

programming without consulting Carrier service personnel.

Unit damage may occur from improper programming.

Manual Reset — If fault condition has been removed, cycle

power to the chiller to reset the VFD.

To enter password and change program values:

1. Press Mode.

2. Upper right decimal point blinks.

3. Display reads “00”. To enter the PROGRAM mode to ac-

cess the parameters, press the Mode button. This will ac-

tivate the PASSWORD prompt (if the password has not

been disabled). The display will read “00” and the upper

right-hand decimal point will be blinking. (See Fig. 33.)

Troubleshooting — Troubleshooting the Motormaster^®

control requires a combination of observing system operation

and VFD information. The drive provides 2 kinds of trouble-

shooting modes: a status matrix using the 3-digit display

(P57, P58) and real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs.

The collective group is displayed through parameters

50-60 and all values are read-only.

•

P50: FAULT HISTORY — Last 8 faults

P51: SOFTWARE version

4. Use the

and

buttons to scroll to the password

value (the factory default password is “1111”) and press

the Mode button. Once the correct password value is

entered, the display will read “P01”, which indicates that

the PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning

of the parameter menu (P01 is the first parameter).

P52: DC BUS VOLTAGE — in percent of nominal.

Usually rated input voltage x 1.4

•

P53: MOTOR VOLAGE — in percent of rated output

voltage

P54: LOAD — in percent of drives rated output current

rating

P55: VDC INPUT — in percent of maximum input:

100 will indicate full scale which is 5 v

P56: 4-20 mA INPUT — in percent of maximum input.

20% = 4 mA, 100% = 20 mA

NOTE: If the display flashes “Er”, the password was incorrect,

and the process to enter the password must be repeated.

5. Press Mode to display present parameter number.

Upper right decimal point blinks.

Use the

parameter number.

and

buttons to scroll to the desired

Manual Starter Trip — If the VFD manual starter (MS-FC-

HS, MS-FC-A1 or MS-FC-B1 depending on model) trips,

locate the inrush current protectors (3 round black disks per

motor) and verify their resistance. For units operating at 208 v

or 230 v, these devices should measure approximately 7 ohms.

For all other voltages, they should measure approximately

20 ohms. Check value with mating plug disconnected, power

to chiller off and at ambient temperature (not hot immediately

after stopping VFD). These are standard resistances at 77 F

(25 C). Resistance values decrease at higher temperatures and

increase at lower temperatures.

REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES — The Comfort-

Link^™replacement modules are shown in Table 40. If the main

base board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that all configura-

tion data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode table and

verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and OPT2

are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or op-

tions (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as well

as any specific time and maintenance schedules.

Once the desired parameter number is found, press the

Mode button to display the present parameter setting. The up-

per right-hand decimal point will begin blinking, indicating

that the present parameter setting is being displayed, and that it

can be changed by using the up and down buttons. Use

and

to change setting. Press Mode to store new setting.

Pressing the Mode will store the new setting and also exit

the PROGRAM mode. To change another parameter, press the

Mode key again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the param-

eter menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last

viewed or changed before exiting). If the Mode key is pressed

within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM mode, the pass-

word is not required to access the parameters. After two min-

utes, the password must be entered in order to access the pa-

rameters again.

To change password: first enter the current password then

change parameter P44 to the desired password.

To disable automatic control mode and enter manual speed

control mode:

Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chillers

(completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder.

This information is needed later in this procedure. If the check-

list does not exist, fill out the current information in the Config-

uration mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and

configurations as needed for this particular installation.

1. Change P05 to ‘01- keypad’.

2. Push UP and DOWN arrow key to set manual speed.

3. Set P05 to ‘04 - 4-20mA control’ to restore 4 to 20 mA

control.

EPM CHIP — The drive uses a electronic programming mod-

ule (EPM) chip to store the program parameters. This is an

EEPROM memory chip and is accessible from the front of the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

MM-A

FB3

FB1

L1 T1

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

L2 T2

OFM1

L3 T3

GRN/YEL

YEL

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

MMR

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

VOLTAGE

VIO 11

240

1/4W

208/230/460/575

380

RED

FROM

13A

AUX-J4

BLK

FB2

FC2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

OFM2

GRN/YEL

CHC

BLK

WHT

BLK

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

HEATERS

(380,460,575V)

a30-4977

BLK

WHT

YEL

LEGEND

AUX — Auxiliary

CONFIGURATION TABLE

CONTROL INPUT

— Fuse Block

MODE

NOMINAL VOLTAGE

START JUMPER

(PINS 25, 2)

MM — Motormaster

OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor

208/230/460/575*

208/380

External control 4-20 mA

TB1-TB2

TB13A-TB2

— Terminal Block

*208-v can run in mode 5 or 6.

Fig. 32 — Typical Motormaster Wiring

EPM

Mode

DANGER

MMV

TERMINAL

BLOCK

B+

B-

DISPLAY

BUTTONS

Mode

Fig. 33 — Motormaster^®V Mode Buttons and Mode Display

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 38 — Fault Codes

FAULT CODE

DESCRIPTION

SOLUTION

High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too high;

Cooling fan has failed (if equipped).

Control Fault: A blank EPM, or an EPM with corrupted data Perform a factory reset using Parameter 48 —

has been installed. PROGRAM SELECTION.

Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible parame- Either remove the EPM or perform a factory

ter version has been installed.

Check cooling fan operation

reset (Parameter 48) to change the parameter

version of the EPM to match the parameter

version of the drive.

CURRENT LIMIT: The output current has exceeded the

CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter 25) and the drive is

Check for loose electrical connections.

Check for faulty condenser fan motor.

reducing the output frequency to reduce the output current. Check Parameter P25 from Table 39 is set

If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT too long, it can trip correctly.

into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF).

Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are

corrupted.

High DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too high; Decel- Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately

eration rate is too fast; Overhauling load.

Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out, indicating

that the serial link has been lost.

Restore factory defaults P48, see section

above. If that does not work, replace EPM.

Check serial connection (computer)

Check settings for PXX.

Check settings in communication software to

match PXX.

Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low.

Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately

Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to ground Reduce boost or increase acceleration values.

short circuit on the output; Failed output transistor; Boost

settings are too high; Acceleration rate is too fast.

If unsuccessful, replace drive.

Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the applica- Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately

tion; Mechanical problem with the driven equipment.

Check for dirty coils

Check for motor bearing failure

Single-phase Fault: Single-phase input power has been

applied to a three-phase drive.

Check input power phasing

EPM Fault: The EPM is missing or damaged.

F2-F9, Fo

Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a problem

Consult factory

Drive display = 60.0 even though it Feedback signal is above set point

is cold outside and it should be run-

ning slower

Check for proper set point

Check liquid line pressure

Drive display = ‘---’ even though

drive should be running

Start jumper is missing

Replace start jumper. See section above

Drive display = 8.0 even though fan Feedback signal is below set point and fan is at minimum

Check for proper set point

Check liquid line pressure

should be running faster

VFD flashes 57 and LCS

speed

Feedback or speed signal lost. Drive will operate at 57 Hz In stand alone mode: Check transducer wiring

until reset or loss of start command. Resetting requires

cycling start command (or power).

and feedback voltage. Feedback voltage dis-

played on P-69. Pin 6 should be 5 v output.

Pin 5 (feedback) should be somewhere

between 0 and 5 v.

LEGEND

EPM

LCS

OEM

VFD

— Electronic Programming Module

— Lost Control Signal

— Outside Equipment Manufacturer

— Variable Frequency Drive

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 39 — Motormaster® V Program Parameters for Operating Modes

MODE

PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION

P01

P02

P03

P04

Line Voltage: 01 = low line, 02 = high line

Carrier Freq: 01 = 4 kHz, 02 = 6 kHz, 03 = 8 kHz

Startup mode: flying restart

Stop mode: coast to stop

Standard Speed source: 01= keypad,

04=4-20mA (NO PI), 05= R22, 06=R134a

P05

P06

P08

P09

P10

P11

P12

P13

P14

P15

P16

P17

P19

P20

P21

P22

P23

P24

P25

P26

P27

P28

P29

P30

P31

P32

P33

TB-14 output: 01 = none

TB-30 output: 01 = none

TB-31 Output: 01 = none

TB-13A function sel: 01 = none

TB-13B function sel: 01 = none

TB-13C function sel: 01 = none

TB-15 output: 01 = none

Control: 01 = Terminal strip

Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600,8,N,2 with timer

Units editing: 02 = whole units

Rotation: 01 = forward only, 03 = reverse only

Acceleration time: 10 sec

Deceleration time: 10 sec

DC brake time: 0

DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0%

Min freq = 8 Hz ~ 100 – 160 rpm

Max freq

Current limit: (%)

Motor overload: 100

Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz

Fixed boost: 0.5% at low frequencies

Accel boost: 0%

Slip compensation: 0%

Preset spd #1: speed if loss of control signal

Preset spd #2: 0

125

100

0.5

110

100

0.5

125

100

0.5

110

100

0.5

Preset spd #3: 0

Preset spd 4 default — R22 set point.

TB12-2 open

Preset spd 5 default — R134a set point.

TB12-2 closed

P34

P35

18.0

12.6

18.0

12.6

18.0

12.6

18.0

12.6

P36

P37

P38

P39

P40

P41

P42

P43

P44

Preset spd 6 default

Preset spd 7 default

Skip bandwidth

Speed scaling

Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz

Load scaling: default (not used so NA)

Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA)

Serial address

200

Password:111

111

Speed at min signal: 8 Hz; used when PID

mode is disabled and 4-20mA input is at 4 mA

Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz. Used

when PID disabled and 4-20mA input is at 20 mA

P45

P46

P47

P48

P61

P62

P63

P64

P65

P66

P67

P68

Clear history? 01 = maintain. (set to 02 to clear)

Program selection: Program 1 – 12

PI Mode: 05= reverse, 0-5V, 01 = no PID

Min feedback = 0 (0V *10)

Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10)

Proportional gain = 4%

Integral gain = .2

PI acell/decel (set point change filter) = 5

Min alarm

Max alarm

LEGEND

NA — Not Applicable

PID — Proportional Integral Derivative

TB — Terminal Block

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

uncommon for actual pump duty to be different than what was

anticipated at time of selection. In many cases, it may be desir-

able to make some field modifications to obtain optimum

pump performance.

Before any pump modifications are made, it is recommend-

ed that actual pump performance be verified and compared to

the applicable pump curve. See base unit installation instruc-

tions. This can be done in a variety of ways:

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut

off all power to this equipment during installation. There

may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all discon-

nect locations to alert others not to restore power until work

is completed.

1. If pump impeller diameter is known:

1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect

all wires from the defective module by unplugging its

connectors.

a. Connect a differential pressure gage across the

pump at the ports provided on the pump volutes.

b. Read GPM from applicable impeller curve.

2. If pump impeller diameter is not known:

2. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting

screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and removing the

module from the control box. Save the screws later use.

3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switch-

es (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the

defective module.

NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to

avoid electrostatic discharge.

4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new

module for return to Carrier.

If pump impeller diameter has been trimmed and the size

is not known, it is necessary to determine which impeller

curve to read.

The easiest way to confirm pump performance is to

“dead-head” the pump and read the differential pressure

across the pressure ports on the pump. “Dead-heading”

can be done by shutting the circuit setter valve on the dis-

charge side of the pump.

NOTE: Although not all pumps can be safely “dead-

headed”, centrifugal pumps (such as on the 30RAP units)

can be “dead-headed” for short amounts of time. It is rec-

ommended to keep the time short due to excessive heat

build-up in the pump.

5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a

Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.

6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Navigator

replacement, make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the

LEN connector.

Since the “dead-head” condition is a no-flow condition,

the head will correspond to the intersection of an impel-

ler curve with the vertical axis of the pump chart. The

correct impeller diameter is that which corresponds to the

measured head.

7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring

power.

8. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch

is in the OFF position.

9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs

blink in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking

and that the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display is

communicating correctly.

10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points

and schedules. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE

CONTACT switch to its previous position.

3. Once the impeller diameter is known, proceed as in

Step 1.

4. Water flow rate can be determined by using a differential

pressure gage with the Bell & Gossett circuit setter bal-

ance valve calculator. (This information is also provided

in the installation instructions.) This method will not di-

rectly measure pressure differential seen by the pump, but

can be used to “double-check” the pump measurement.

5. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter-

minal block are secure.

6. For factory-installed hydronic system, verify that:

Table 40 — Replacement Modules

REPLACEMENT

PART NO. (with

Software)

REPLACEMENT PART

NO. (without Software)

MODULE

Main Base

• All air has been purged from the system.

30RA502134

HK50AA029

Board (MBB)

• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.

Scrolling

Marquee

Display

7. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not

providing sufficient flow.

HK50AA031

HK50AA030

Energy

Management

Module

8. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise

when viewed from motor end of pump.

PUMP MODIFICATIONS AND IMPELLER TRIMMING

— See applicable section in the Installation instructions.

RESET OF CHILLER WATER FLOW — See applicable sec-

tion in the Installation instructions.

CHANGING OF PUMP SEALS — See Bell & Gossett ser-

vice instruction manual provided with the hydronic package.

30GT515218

HK50AA033

HK50AA028

N/A

(EMM)

Navigator

Display

EXV

AUX

30GT515217

32GB500442E

HK50AA026

N/A

Hydronic Package — If the unit is equipped with a

factory-installed hydronic package, consult the information be-

low for proper maintenance and service. In addition to this

information, each factory-installed hydronic package is sup-

plied with a packet of information supplied by the manufactur-

er, Bell & Gossett. Carrier Corporation strongly recommends

that this information be thoroughly reviewed prior to operation

of the chiller.

PUMP PERFORMANCE CHECK — The factory-installed

pumps in the 30RAP units are shipped with a single impeller

size available for that pump. The pump was selected based on

the flow and head requirements as provided to Carrier. It is not

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule — The fol-

lowing are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions

may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often

than recommended.

Routine:

For machines with e-coat condenser coils:

•

Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and

industrial applications.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary.

Every month:

Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig-

erant loss and presence of moisture.

Every 3 months (for all machines):

core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent

damage to air centers.

•

CAUTION

Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between

air centers and refrigerant tubes.

•

Check refrigerant charge.

Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant

leaks, repair as necessary.

•

Check chilled water flow switch operation.

Check all condenser fans for proper operation.

Check compressor oil level.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart — Possi-

ble causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown be-

low and in Table 41. Refer to Fig. 3-7 for component arrange-

ment and control wiring diagrams.

GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored,

restart is automatic through normal MBB start-up.

UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS

OFF — When the switch is OFF, the unit will stop immediate-

ly. Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch

control or in the REMOTE CONTACT position for control

through remote contact closure.

CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN —

After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected,

reset is manual by resetting the alarm with the scrolling mar-

quee as shown in Table 42.

OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — De-

termine the cause of the failure and correct. Reset circuit break-

er(s). Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is

complete.

COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when

cooling load has been satisfied. Unit restarts when required to

satisfy leaving fluid temperature set point.

Every 12 months (for all machines):

•

Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.

Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.

Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than

± 2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.

Obtain and test an oil sample. Change oil only if

necessary.

Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti-

freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.

Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.

Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure

drop, replace as necessary.

Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.

Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.

Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they

are securely fastened to the motor shaft.

Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all

components.

•

Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled

Water Temperature — Saturated Suction Temperature)

which may indicate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if

necessary.

THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an

open or shorted condition, the unit will be shut down. Replace

EWT, LWT, or OAT as required. Unit restarts automatically,

but must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the

scrolling marquee as shown in Table 42.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Con-

denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser

coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage

the coil.

If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of

the safety devices listed, determine and correct cause

before attempting another restart.

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain

proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and

removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the

coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should

be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the

coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and

brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety

glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and

gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or

industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens-

er coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for clean-

ing condenser coils.

LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can

lead to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls

have several override modes built in which will attempt to keep

the chiller from shutting down. Low fluid flow, low refrigerant

charge and plugged filter driers are the main causes for this

condition. To avoid permanent damage and potential freezing

of the system, do NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm

conditions without identifying and correcting the cause(s).

COMPRESSOR SAFETIES — The 30RAP units with Com-

fortLink™ controls include a compressor protection board that

protects the operation of each of the compressors. Each board

senses the presence or absence of current to each compressor.

If there is a command for a compressor to run and there is

no current, then one of the following safeties or conditions

have turned the compressor off:

Compressor Overcurrent — All compressors have internal

line breaks or a motor protection device located in the com-

pressor electrical box.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and

uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray

straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 de-

gree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the

Compressor Short Circuit — There will not be current if the

compressor circuit breaker that provides short circuit protection

has tripped.

Compressor Motor Over Temperature — The internal line-

break or over temperature switch has opened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

High-Pressure Switch Trip — The high pressure switch has

opened. Below are the factory settings for the fixed high pres-

sure switch.

reset automatically before the motor protector resets, which

may take up to 2 hours.

High Discharge Gas Temperature Protection — Units

equipped with digital compressors have an additional thermis-

tor located on the discharge line, If discharge temperature ex-

ceeds 265 F (129.4 C), the digital compressor will be shut off.

CUTOUT

CUT-IN

30RAP UNIT

SIZE

psig

kPa

psig

kPa

010-060

650

4482

500

3447

Alarms will also occur if the current sensor board malfunc-

tions or is not properly connected to its assigned digital input. If

the compressor is commanded OFF and the current sensor

reads ON, an alert is generated. This will indicate that a com-

pressor contactor has failed closed. In this case, a special mode,

Compressor Stuck on Control, will be enabled and all other

compressors will be turned off. An alarm will then be enabled

to indicate that service is required. Outdoor fans will continue

to operate. The first outdoor fan stage is turned on immediately.

The other stages of fan will be turned on as required by SCT.

ASTP Protection Trip — All non-digital Copeland compres-

sors are equipped with an advanced scroll temperature protec-

tion (ASTP). A label located above the terminal box identifies

models that contain this technology. See Fig. 34.

Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal

or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit or the

whole unit to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as

described in Table 42.

Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if

the condition corrects itself. The following method must be

used to reset manual alarms:

Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the

alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the

LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press

Fig. 34 — Advanced Scroll Temperature

Protection Label

Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of inter-

nal discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll

compressor when the internal temperature reaches approxi-

mately 300 F. At this temperature, an internal bi-metal disk

valve opens and causes the scroll elements to separate, which

stops compression. Suction and discharge pressures balance

while the motor continues to run. The longer the compressor

runs unloaded, the longer it must cool before the bi-metal disk

resets. See Fig. 35 for approximate reset times.

and

until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET

ENTER

ALL CURRENT ALARMS” is displayed. Press

ENTER

The control will prompt the user for a password, by displaying

PASS and WORD. Press to display the default pass-

ENTER

for each character. If the password

word, 1111. Press

ENTER

has been changed, use the arrow keys to change each individu-

To manually reset ASTP, the compressor should be stopped

and allowed to cool. If the compressor is not stopped, the motor

will run until the motor protector trips, which occurs up to

90 minutes later. Advanced scroll temperature protection will

al character. Toggle the display to “YES” and press

The alarms will be reset.

ENTER

120

110

100

Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes)

*Times are approximate.

NOTE: Various factors, including high humidity, high ambient temperature,

and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-down times.

Fig. 35 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down Time After Compressor is Stopped*

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 41 — Troubleshooting

SYMPTOMS

CAUSE

REMEDY

Cooler Circulating Pump Does

Not Run

Power line open

Reset circuit breaker.

Control fuse or circuit breaker open

Check control circuit for ground or short. Reset breaker and

replace fuse.

Tripped power breaker

Loose terminal connection

Improperly wired controls

Low line voltage

Check the controls. Find the cause of trip and reset breaker.

Check connections.

Check wiring and rewire if necessary.

Check line voltage — determine location of

voltage drop and remedy deficiency.

Pump motor defective

Check motor winding for open or short.

Replace compressor if necessary.

Pump seized

Replace pump.

Compressor Cycles

Off on Loss of Charge

Low refrigerant charge

Repair leak and recharge.

Compressor Cycles Off on Cooler

Freeze Protection

Thermistor failure

Replace thermistor.

System load was reduced faster than controller could

remove stages

Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into the

control band. Avoid rapidly removing system load.

Compressor Shuts Down on

High-Pressure Control

High-pressure control acting erratically

Noncondensables in system

Condenser dirty

Replace control.

Evacuate and recharge.

Clean condenser.

Fans not operating

Repair or replace if defective.

Reduce charge.

System overcharged with refrigerant

Low refrigerant charge

Unit Operates Too Long

or Continuously

Add refrigerant.

Control contacts fused

Replace control.

Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier

Defective insulation

Clean or replace as needed.

Replace or repair as needed.

Check compressor and replace if necessary.

Support piping as required.

Check for loose pipe connections or damaged compressor

Replace compressor (worn bearings).

Check for loose compressor holddown bolts.

Repair leak.

Damaged compressor

Unusual or Loud System

Noises

Piping vibration

Compressor noisy

Compressor Loses Oil

Leak in system

Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls)

Oil trapped in line

Replace compressor.

Check piping for oil traps.

Repair leak and recharge.

Replace filter drier.

Hot Liquid Line

Shortage of refrigerant due to leak

Restricted filter drier

Frosted Liquid Line

Frosted Suction Line

Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: this is a Replace valve if defective.

normal condition for brine applications)

Stuck EXV

Replace valve if defective.

Freeze-Up

Improper charging

Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through the cooler

while charging, and suction pressure in cooler is equal to or

greater than pressure corresponding to 32 F (0° C).

System not drained for winter shutdown

Loose Thermistor

Recommended that system be filled with an appropriate gly-

col mixture to prevent freezing of pumps and fluid tubing.

Verify thermistors are fully inserted in wells.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes

ALARM/ ALARM

WHY WAS THIS

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

ALERT

CODE

DESCRIPTION

ALARM

ALERT

GENERATED?

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

Manual air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

beyond capability.

Circuit A, Compressor 1

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor A1 shut

down.

T051

A051

T052

A052

T055

A055

T056

A056

Alert

Alarm

Alert

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Circuit A, Compressor 1

Failure

Welded compressor contac-

Manual

Unit shut down

tor, CSB wiring error.

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

Manual air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

Circuit A, Compressor 2

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor A2 shut

down.

beyond capability.

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Circuit A, Compressor 2

Failure

Welded compressor contac-

Manual

Alarm

Alert

Unit shut down

tor, CSB wiring error.

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

Manual air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

Circuit B, Compressor 1

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor B1 shut

down.

beyond capability.

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Circuit B, Compressor 1

Failure

Welded compressor contac-

Manual

Alarm

Alert

Unit shut down

tor, CSB wiring error.

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

Manual air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

Circuit B, Compressor 2

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor B2 shut

down.

beyond capability.

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Circuit B, Compressor 2

Failure

Welded compressor contac-

Manual

Alarm

Unit shut down

tor, CSB wiring error.

Cooler Leaving Fluid

Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller shut down

immediately

Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

A060

A061

Alarm

cable/wire or wiring error.

Cooler Entering Fluid

Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller shut down

immediately

Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

cable/wire or wiring error.

If return gas sensors are

enabled (RG.EN) and

Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

T068

T069

None

Circuit A Return Gas Thermistor Failure

Circuit B Return Gas Thermistor Failure

Circuit A shut down

Circuit B shut down

thermistor is outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

cable/wire or wiring error.

If return gas sensors are

enabled (RG.EN) and

thermistor is outside range of

–40 to 245 F –40 to 118 C)

Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

cable/wire or wiring error.

Temperature reset

disabled. Chiller runs

under normal control/set

points. When capacity

reaches 0, cooler/pump

heaters are energized.

Outside Air Thermistor

Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

T073

Alert

cable/wire or wiring error.

Temperature reset

disabled. Chiller runs

under normal control/set

points.

Space Temperature/Dual Chiller

Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

T074

T077

T078

Alert

cable/wire or wiring error.

Circuit A Saturated

Suction Temperature

exceeds Cooler Leaving

Fluid Temperature

Faulty expansion valve or

Faulty expansion valve,

suction pressure transducer

or leaving fluid thermistor.

Circuit A shutdown after

pumpdown complete.

suction pressure transducer

Automatic

or leaving fluid

thermistor.

Circuit B Saturated

Suction Temperature

exceeds Cooler Leaving

Fluid Temperature

Faulty expansion valve or

Faulty expansion valve,

suction pressure transducer

or leaving fluid thermistor.

Circuit B shutdown after

pumpdown complete

suction pressure transducer

Automatic

or leaving fluid

thermistor.

Dual LWT thermistor failure,

Automatic damaged cable/wire or

wiring error.

Lead/Lag LWT

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller runs as a stand

alone machine

T079

T090

T091

T092

Alert

Thermistor Failure

Transducer failure, poor

Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

Circuit A Discharge

Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to

667 psig)

Circuit A shut down

Circuit B shut down

Circuit A shut down

Circuit B shut down

Transducer failure, poor

Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

Circuit B Discharge

Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to

667 psig)

Transducer failure, poor

Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

Circuit A Suction

Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to 420

psig)

Circuit B Suction

Pressure Transducer

Failure

Transducer failure, poor

Automatic connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

Outside of range (0 to

420 psig)

T093

T094

Alert

Discharge Gas

Thermistor Failure

Discharge thermistor (DTT) is Digital compressor shut

either open or shorted

Thermistor failure, damaged

Automatic

down.

cable/wire or wiring error.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

WHY WAS THIS

ACTION TAKEN

ALARM

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

DESCRIPTION

BY CONTROL

GENERATED?

If the compressors are off

and discharge pressure

reading is < 26 psig for

30 sec.

Circuit not allowed to

start.

Refrigerant leak or

transducer failure

T110

T111

T112

T113

Alert

Circuit A Loss of Charge

Manual

If the compressors are off

and discharge pressure

reading is < 26 psig for

30 sec.

Circuit not allowed to

start.

Refrigerant leak or

transducer failure

Circuit B Loss of Charge

Circuit saturated suction

temperature pressure

transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)

for 5 minutes

Faulty Expansion valve,

faulty suction pressure

transducer or high entering

fluid temperature.

Circuit A High Saturated

Suction Temperature

Circuit shut down

Circuit saturated suction

temperature pressure

transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)

for 5 minutes

Faulty Expansion valve,

faulty suction pressure

transducer or high entering

fluid temperature.

Circuit B High Saturated

Suction Temperature

Automatic restart Faulty expansion valve,

Suction superheat is

less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5

minutes.

after first daily

occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

faulty suction pressure

transducer, faulty suction gas

thermistor, circuit

Circuit A Low Suction

Superheat

T114

T115

T116

T117

Alert

Circuit A shut down.

Circuit B shut down.

Circuit shut down

overcharged

Automatic restart Faulty expansion valve,

Suction superheat is

less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5

minutes.

after first daily

occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

faulty suction pressure

transducer, faulty suction

gas thermistor, circuit

overcharged

Circuit B Low Suction

Superheat

Mode 7 caused the com-

pressor to unload 6 consecu-

tive times with less than a

30-minute interval between

each circuit shutdown.

Faulty expansion valve, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, faulty suction

pressure transducer, low

cooler fluid flow

Circuit A Low Cooler

Suction Temperature

Manual

Mode 8 caused the com-

pressor to unload 6 consecu-

tive times with less than a

30-minute interval between

each circuit shutdown.

Faulty expansion valve, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, faulty suction

pressure transducer, low

cooler fluid flow

Circuit B Low Cooler

Suction Temperature

Refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, head pressure

control.

High Discharge Gas

Temperature Alert

Discharge Thermistor (DTT) Compressor A1 shut

reading is greater than 250 F down

T118

A118

Alert

Automatic

Manual

3 Discharge Gas Tempera-

Compressor A1 shut

ture alarms occur within a

down

Refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, head pressure

control.

High Discharge Gas

Temperature

Alarm

day

Automatic, only

after first 3 daily

occurrences.

Faulty transducer/high

pressure switch, low/

restricted condenser

airflow

Manual reset

Circuit A High

Compressor operation out-

Circuit shut down

T126

T127

Alert

thereafter. Read-

ing from OAT sen-

sor must drop 5 F

(2.8 C) before

restart

Discharge Pressure

side of operating envelope.

Automatic, only

after first 3 daily

occurrences. Man- Faulty transducer/high

ual reset thereafter. pressure switch, low/

Reading from OAT restricted condenser

Circuit B High

Discharge Pressure

Compressor operation out-

Circuit shut down

side of operating envelope.

sensor must drop

5 F (2.8 C) before

restart

airflow

Automatic

Suction pressure below

restart after first

daily occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Faulty or sticking EXV, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier.

Circuit A Low Suction

Pressure

T133

T134

Alert

34 psig for 8 seconds or

below 23 psig

Circuit shut down

Automatic

Suction pressure below

34 psig for 8 seconds or

below 23 psig

restart after first

daily occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Faulty or sticking EXV, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier.

Circuit B Low Suction

Pressure

Reverse any two incoming

power leads to correct. Check

for correct fan rotation first.

Reverse Rotation

Detected

Incoming chiller power leads Chiller not allowed to

A140

A150

A151

Alert

Alarm

Manual

not phased correctly

start.

Automatic once

Chiller shutdown

without going through

pumpdown.

CCN emergency stop

command received

CCN command for CCN Network

EMSTOP returns to command.

normal

Emergency Stop

Manual once

configuration errors

are corrected

One or more illegal

configurations exists.

Chiller is not allowed to

start.

Configuration error.

Check unit settings.

Illegal Configuration

Automatic once

alarms/alerts are

cleared that pre-

Alarm notifies user

that chiller is 100%

Unit Down Due to

Failure

Both circuits are down due

to alarms/alerts.

Chiller is unable

to run.

A152

Alarm

vent the chiller from down.

starting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

WHY WAS THIS

ACTION TAKEN

ALARM

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

DESCRIPTION

BY CONTROL

GENERATED?

Occupancy schedule

Automatic when

correct clock control

restarts.

Time/Date/Month/

Day/Year not

properly set.

Real Time Clock

Hardware Failure

will not be used. Chiller

T153

A154

Alert

Internal clock on MBB fails

defaults to Local On

mode.

Serial EEPROM

Hardware Failure

Chiller is unable

Hardware failure with MBB

to run.

Main Base Board

failure.

Alarm

Manual

Potential failure of

MBB. Download

current operating

software. Replace

MBB if error occurs

again.

Serial EEPROM

Storage Failure

Configuration/storage

No Action

T155

Alert

Manual

failure with MBB

Critical Serial EEPROM

Storage Failure

Configuration/storage

failure with MBB

Chiller is not allowed

to run.

Main Base Board

failure.

A156

A157

Alarm

Manual

Hardware failure with

peripheral device

Chiller is not allowed

to run.

Main Base Board

failure.

A/D Hardware Failure

Wiring error, faulty

wiring or failed

EXV board.

Loss of Communication

with EXV Board

MBB loses communication

with EXV board

Chiller is not allowed

to run.

A172

Alarm

Automatic

4 to 20 mA

temperature reset

disabled. Demand

Limit set to 100%. 4 to

20 mA set point

disabled.

Wiring error, faulty

wiring or failed

Energy Manage-

ment Module (EMM).

Loss of Communication

with EMM

MBB loses communication

with EMM

T173

Alert

Automatic

If configured with EMM and

input less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA

Set point function

disabled. Chiller

controls to CSP1.

Faulty signal

4 to 20 mA Cooling Set

Point Input Failure

T174

T175

Alert

Automatic

generator, wiring

error, or faulty EMM.

Wiring error, faulty

wiring or failed

AUX board.

Loss of Communication

with the AUX Board

MBB loses communication

with AUX Board.

Reset function

4 to 20 mA

If configured with EMM

and input less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA

Faulty signal

disabled. Chiller

returns to normal set

point control.

T176

T177

Alert

Temperature Reset

Input Failure

Automatic

generator, wiring

error, or faulty EMM.

Demand limit function

disabled. Chiller

returns to 100%

demand limit

If configured with EMM and

input less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA

Faulty signal

generator, wiring

error, or faulty EMM.

4 to 20 mA Demand

Limit Input Failure

control.

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

are closed when Pump 2

output is energized or if

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

are closed when Pump 1

output is energized.

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

auxiliary contacts.

Cooler Pump Auxiliary

Contact Inputs Miswired

Both pump outputs

are turned off.

A189

Alarm

Manual

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

did not close within

26 seconds after pump

was started

Cooler Pump 1 Aux

Contacts Failed to Close

at Start-Up

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started

if available.

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

T190

T191

T192

T193

Alert

Manual

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

did not close within

26 seconds after pump

was started

Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Failed to Close

at Start-Up

Pump 2 turned off.

Pump 1 will be started

if available.

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

Cooler Pump 1 Failed

to Provide Flow at

Start-Up

Pump 1 did not provide

flow to close flow switch

within 60 seconds

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started

if available.

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

Cooler Pump 2 Failed

to Provide Flow at

Start-Up

Pump 2 did not provide

flow to close flow switch

within 60 seconds

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started

if available.

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

open for 26 seconds after

initially made. All

Pump 2 will be started

if available. Chiller

allowed to run if

Pump 2 successfully

starts.

Cooler Pump 1 Aux

Contacts Opened

During Normal

Operation

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

T194

T195

Alert

Manual

compressors shut down.

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

open for 26 seconds after

initially made. All

compressors shut down.

Pump 2 turned off.

Pump 1 will be started

if available. Chiller

allowed to run if

Pump 1 successfully

starts.

Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Opened

During Normal

Operation

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

All compressors

shut down. Pump 1

turned off. Pump 2 will

be started if available.

Chiller allowed to run if

Pump 2 successfully

starts and flow switch

is closed.

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

Cooler flow switch contacts

open for 3 seconds after

initially made

Flow Lost While Pump 1

Running

T196

Alert

Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

WHY WAS THIS

ACTION TAKEN

ALARM

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

DESCRIPTION

BY CONTROL

GENERATED?

All compressors shut

down. Pump 2 turned

off. Pump 1 will be

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

Cooler flow switch contacts

open for 3 seconds after

initially made

Flow Lost While Pump 2

Running

started if available.

Chiller allowed to run if

Pump 1 successfully

starts and flow switch

is closed.

T197

Alert

Manual

Cooler Pump 1 Aux

Contacts Closed While

Pump Off

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

closed for 26 seconds

when pump state is off

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

Chiller not allowed to

start

Automatic when

T198

T199

Alert

aux contacts open

(welded contacts)

Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Closed While

Pump Off

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

closed for 26 seconds

when pump state is off

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

(welded contacts)

Chiller not allowed to

start

Automatic when

aux contacts open

Cooler flow switch contacts

failed to close within

Chiller not allowed to

start. For models with

dual pumps, the

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure, faulty flow

switch or interlock

Cooler Flow/Interlock

Contacts Failed to Close

at Start-Up

1 minute (if cooler pump

control is enabled) or

within 5 minutes (if cooler

pump control is not

T200

Alert

Manual

second pump will be

started if available

enabled) after start-up

All compressors shut

down. For models with

dual pumps, the

second pump will be

started if available

Cooler pump failure,

faulty flow switch or

interlock, pump

circuit breaker

tripped

Cooler Flow/Interlock

Contacts Opened

During Normal

Operation

Flow switch opens for at

least 3 seconds after

being initially closed

A201

A202

Alarm

If configured for cooler

pump control and flow

switch input is closed for

5 minutes while pump

output(s) are off

Cooler Pump Interlock

Closed When Pump is

Off

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

(welded contacts)

Automatic when

aux contacts open

Chiller shut down

Wiring error, faulty

wiring, failed Slave

chiller MBB module,

power loss at slave

chiller, wrong slave

address.

Dual chiller control

disabled. Chiller runs

as a stand-alone

machine.

Master chiller MBB

loses communication

with slave chiller MBB

Loss of Communication

with Slave Chiller

T203

T204

Alert

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty

wiring, failed master

chiller MBB module,

power loss at Master

chiller.

Dual chiller control

disabled. Chiller runs

as a stand-alone

machine

Slave chiller MBB loses

communication with

master chiller MBB

Loss of Communication

with Master Chiller

CCN Address for

both chillers is the

same. Must be

different. Check

CCN.A under the

OPT2 sub-mode in

Configuration at both

chillers.

Dual chiller routine

disabled. Master/slave

run as stand-alone

chillers.

Master and slave chiller

have the same CCN

address (CCN.A)

Master and Slave Chiller

with Same Address

T205

T206

A207

Alert

Automatic

Building load greater

than unit capacity,

low water/brine flow

or compressor fault.

Check for other

LWT read is greater than

LCW Alert Limit, Total

capacity is 100% and LWT

is greater than LWT

High Leaving Chilled

Water Temperature

Alert only. No action

taken.

Automatic

reading one minute ago

alarms/alerts.

Both EWT and LWT

must be at least 6 F

(3.3 C) above Brine

Freeze point

Chiller shutdown

without going through

pumpdown. Cooler

pump continues to

run a minimum of

5 minutes (if control

enabled).

Cooler Freeze

Protection

Cooler EWT or LWT is less

than Brine Freeze (BR.FZ)

Faulty thermistor,

low water flow.

Alarm

(BR.FZ).

Automatic for first,

Manual reset thereaf-

ter.

Cooler EWT is less than

LWT by 3° F (1.7° C) for

1 minute after a circuit is

started

Faulty cooler pump,

low water flow,

plugged fluid

strainer.

Chiller shutdown.

EWT or LWT

A208

T300

Alarm

Alert

Cooler pump shut off

(if control enabled).

Manual

Thermistor failure

Pump 1 Service

Countdown (P.1.DN)

expired. Complete pump 1

maintenance and enter

'YES' for Pump 1

Cooler Pump 1

Scheduled

Maintenance Due

Routine pump

maintenance

required

None

Automatic

Maintenance Done

(P.1.MN) item.

Pump 2 Service

Countdown (P.2.DN)

expired. Complete pump 2

maintenance and

Cooler Pump 2

Scheduled

Maintenance Due

Routine pump

maintenance

required

T301

Alert

Automatic

enter 'YES' for Pump 1

Maintenance Done

(P.2.MN) item.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

WHY WAS THIS

ACTION TAKEN

ALARM

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

DESCRIPTION

BY CONTROL

GENERATED?

Strainer Service

Countdown (S.T.DN)

Strainer Blowdown

Scheduled

Routine strainer

maintenance

required

expired. Complete strainer

T302

T303

Alert

None

Automatic

blowdown and enter 'YES'

for Strainer Maintenance

Done (S.T.MN) item.

Maintenance Due

Coil Service Countdown

(C.L.DN) expired.

Routine condenser

coil maintenance

required

Condenser Coil

Maintenance Due

Complete condenser coil

None

cleaning and enter 'YES'

for Coil Maintenance Done

(C.L.MN) item.

Current Sensor Board

A1 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor A1 shut

down

CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T500

T501

T502

T503

T504

Alert

Automatic

Current Sensor Board

A2 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor A2 shut

down

CSB failure.

Wiring error.

Current Sensor Board

A3 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor A3 shut

down

CSB failure.

Wiring error.

Current Sensor Board

B1 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor B1 shut

down

CSB failure.

Wiring error.

Current Sensor Board

B2 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor B2 shut

down

CSB failure.

Wiring error.

Current Sensor Board

B3 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor B3 shut

down

CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T505

T950

Alert

Automatic

Loss of Communication

with Water System

Manager

No communications have

been received by the MBB

within 5 minutes of last

transmission

WSM forces removed.

Chiller runs under own

control

Failed module, wiring

error, failed

transformer, loose

connection plug,

wrong address

T951

T952

Alert

Loss of Communication

with Chillervisor System

Manager

No communications have

been received by the MBB

within 5 minutes of last

transmission

CSM forces removed.

Chiller runs under own

control

Automatic

Failed module, wiring

error, failed

transformer, loose

connection plug,

wrong address

Loss of Communication

with Hydronic System

Manager

No communications have

been received by the MBB

within 5 minutes of last

transmission

HSM forces removed.

Chiller runs under own

control

Failed module, wiring

error, failed

transformer, loose

connection plug,

wrong address

LEGEND FOR TABLE 42

CCN

—

Carrier Comfort Network

Current Sensor Board

CSB

EEPROM

EMM

EWT

EXV

Electronic Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory

Energy Management Module

Entering Fluid Temperature

Electronic Expansion Valve

Hydronic System Manager

Leaving Chilled Water

HSM

LCW

LWT

Leaving Fluid Temperature

Main Base Board

MBB

OAT

Outdoor-Air Temperature

SCT

Saturated Condensing Temperature

Water System Manager

WSM

COMPRESSOR FAILURE ALERTS

T051, T052 (Circuit A Compresser Failures)

Low Refrigerant Charge — If the compressor operates for an

extended period of time with low refrigerant charge, the com-

pressor ASTP device will open, which will cause the compres-

sor to trip on its overload protection device.

Circuit Breaker Trip — The compressors are protected from

short circuit by a breaker in the control box.

T055, T056 (Circuit B Compressor Failures) — Alert codes

051, 052, 055, and 056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and

B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the current sensor

(CS) does not detect compressor current during compressor op-

eration. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads OFF while the compressor

relay has been commanded ON, an alert is generated.

Wiring Error — A wiring error might not allow the compres-

sor to start.

To check out alerts T051-T056:

POSSIBLE CAUSES

1. Turn on the compressor in question using Service Test

mode. If the compressor does not start, then most likely

the problem is one of the following: HPS open, open in-

ternal protection, circuit breaker trip, incorrect safety wir-

ing, or incorrect compressor wiring.

2. If the compressor does start, verify it is rotating in the cor-

rect direction.

Compressor Overload — Either the compressor internal over-

load protector is open or the external overload protector (Kri-

wan module) has activated. The external overload protector

modules are mounted in the compressor wiring junction box.

Temperature sensors embedded in the compressor motor wind-

ings are the inputs to the module. The module is powered with

24 vac from the units main control box. The module output is a

normally closed contact that is wired in series with the com-

pressor contactor coil. In a compressor motor overload condi-

tion, contact opens, deenergizing the compressor contactor.

IMPORTANT: Prolonged operation in the wrong direction

can damage the compressor. Correct rotation can be veri-

fied by a gage set and looking for a differential pressure

rise on start-up.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C). Failure of this thermistor will

disable any elements of the control which requires its use. The

cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T55, or

T58 device, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring er-

ror, or a loose connection.

IMPORTANT: If the CS is always detecting current, verify

that the compressor is on. If the compressor is on, check

the contactor and the relay on the MBB. If the compressor

is off and there is no current, verify the CSB wiring and

replace if necessary.

T090 (Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure)

IMPORTANT: Return to Normal mode and observe com-

pressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor

is working and condenser fans are energized.

T091 (Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure) —

Alert codes 090 and 091 are for circuits A and B respectively.

These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0

to 667.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use

the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is

usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose

connection.

COMPRESSOR STUCK ON FAILURE ALARMS

Circuit A A051, A052

Circuit B A055, A056 — Alarm codes 051, 052, 055, and

056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and B2. These alarms oc-

cur when the CSB detects current when the compressor should

be off. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads ON while the compressor

relay has been commanded OFF for a period of 4 continuous

seconds, an alarm is generated. These alarms are only moni-

tored for a period of 10 seconds after the compressor relay has

been commanded OFF. This is done to facilitate a service tech-

nician forcing a relay to test a compressor.

In addition, if a compressor stuck failure occurs and the cur-

rent sensor board reports the compressor and the request off,

certain diagnostics will take place as follows:

T092 (Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure)

T093 (Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure)

—

Alert codes 092 and 093 are for circuits A and B respectively.

These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0

to 420.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use

the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is

usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose

connection.

T094 (Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure) — This alert oc-

curs for units which have the digital compressor installed on

circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is open or shorted, the

circuit will be shutoff. The alert will reset itself when discharge

temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C). The cause of the alert

is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor.

1. If any of the compressors are diagnosed as stuck on and

the current sensor board is on and the request is off, the

control will command the condenser fans to maintain

normal head pressure.

T110 (Circuit A Loss of Charge)

T111 (Circuit B Loss of Charge) — Alert codes 110 and 111

are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur when

the compressor is OFF and the discharge pressure is less than

26 psig.

2. The control will shut-off all other compressors.

The possible causes include welded contactor or frozen

compressor relay on the MBB.

To check out alarms A051-A056:

T112 (Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature)

T113 (Circuit B High Saturated Suction Temperature)

—

1. Place the unit in Service Test mode. All compressors

should be off.

2. Verify that there is not 24-v at the contactor coil. If there

is 24 v at the contactor, check relay on MBB and wiring.

Alert codes 112 and 113 occur when compressors in a circuit

have been running for at least 5 minutes and the circuit saturat-

ed suction temperature is greater than 70 F (21.1 C). The high

saturated suction alert is generated and the circuit is shut down.

3. Check for welded contactor.

4. Verify CSB wiring.

5. Return to Normal mode and observe compressor opera-

tion to verify that compressor current sensor is working

and condenser fans are energized.

T114 (Circuit A Low Superheat)

T115 (Circuit B Low Superheat) — Alert codes 114 and 115

occur when the superheat of a circuit is less than 5 F (2.8 C) for

5 continuous minutes. The low superheat alert is generated and

the circuit is shut down.

T116 (Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature)

A060 (Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure)

—

The

T117 (Circuit B Low Cooler Suction Temperature) — Alert

codes 116 and 117 are for circuits A and B respectively. These

alerts are generated if the capacity stages are reduced three

times without a 30 minute interval between capacity reductions

due to operating mode 7 or mode 8.

sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to

118 C) then the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usu-

ally a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by

a wiring error, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor

will shut down the entire unit.

T118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alert)

A118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alarm)

A061 (Cooler Entering Thermistor Failure) — If the sensor

reading is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to116 C) then

the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty

thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring er-

ror, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will shut

down the entire unit.

T068, T69 (Circuit A,B Compressor Return Gas Tempera-

ture Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs when the com-

pressor return gas temperature sensor is outside the range of

–40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will shut

down the appropriate circuit.

—

This

alert or alarm occurs for units which have the digital compres-

sor installed on circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is great-

er than 268 F (131.1 C), the circuit will be shut off. The alert

will reset itself when discharge temperature is less than 250 F

(121.1 C). If this alert occurs 3 times within a day, the A118

alarm will be generated and the alarm must be reset manually.

The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a

faulty thermistor.

T126 (Circuit A High Head Pressure)

T073 (Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This

alert occurs when the outside air temperature sensor is outside

the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this therm-

istor will disable any elements of the control which requires its

use.

T074 (Space Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert

occurs when the space temperature sensor is outside the range

T127 (Circuit B High Head Pressure) — Alert codes 126 and

127 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur

when the appropriate saturated condensing temperature is

greater than the operating envelope shown in Fig 14. Prior to

the alert, the control will shut down one compressor on a circuit

if that circuit's saturated condensing temperature is greater than

the maximum SCT minus 5° F (2.7° C). If SCT continues to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

rise to greater than the maximum SCT, the alert will occur and

the circuit's remaining compressor will shut down. The cause

of the alarm is usually an overcharged system, high outdoor

ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged

filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch.

T153 (Real Time Clock Hardware Failure) — A problem

has been detected with MBB real time clock hardware. Try re-

setting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm

continues, the board should be replaced.

A154 (Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure) — A problem

has been detected with the EEPROM on the MBB. Try

resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm

continues, the board should be replaced.

T155 (Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A problem

has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. Try

resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert

continues, the board should be replaced.

A156 (Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A

problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the

MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If

the alarm continues, the board should be replaced.

T133 (Circuit A Low Suction Pressure)

T134 (Circuit B Low Suction Pressure) — Alert codes 133

and 134 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts are

generated if one of the two following conditions is satisfied:

the circuit suction pressure is below 34 psig (234.4 kPa) for 8

seconds, or the suction pressure is below 23 psig (158.6 kPa).

The cause of this alert may be low refrigerant charge, plugged

liquid line filter drier, or sticking EXV. Check head pressure

operation. If not equipped, consider adding low ambient tem-

perature head pressure control.

Add wind baffles if required.

A140 (Reverse Rotation Detected) — A test is made once, on

power up, for suction pressure change on the first activated cir-

cuit. The unit control determines failure as follows:

1. The suction pressure of both circuits is sampled 5 seconds

before the compressor is brought on, right when the com-

pressor is brought on and 5 seconds afterwards.

2. The rate of suction pressure change from 5 seconds be-

fore the compressor is brought on to when the compres-

sor is brought on is calculated.

3. The rate of suction pressure change from when the

compressor is brought on to 5 seconds afterwards is

calculated.

A157 (A/D Hardware Failure) — A problem has been detect-

ed with A/D conversion on the boards. Try resetting the power

and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board

should be replaced.

A172 (Loss of Communication with the EXV Board)

—

This alarm indicates that there are communications problems

with the EXV board. The alarm will automatically reset.

T173 (Energy Management Module Communication Fail-

ure) — This alert indicates that there are communications

problems with the energy management. All functions per-

formed by the EMM will stop, which can include demand lim-

it, reset and capacity input. The alarm will automatically reset.

T174 (4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure) — This

alert indicates a problem has been detected with cooling set

point 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA

or greater than 22 mA.

T175 (Loss of Communication with the AUX Board) —

This alarm indicates that there are communications problems

with the AUX board. All functions performed by the AUX

board will stop, which can include digital scroll unloader oper-

ation and low ambient head pressure control. The alarm will

automatically reset.

4. With the above information, the test for reverse rotation is

made. If the suction pressure change 5 seconds after com-

pression is greater than the suction pressure change 5 sec-

onds before compression – 1.25, then there is a reverse

rotation error.

This alarm will disable mechanical cooling and will require

manual reset.

A150 (Unit is in Emergency Stop) — If the CCN emergency

stop command is received, the alarm is generated and the unit

will be immediately stopped.

If the CCN point name "EMSTOP" in the system table is set

to emergency stop, the unit will shut down immediately and

broadcast an alarm back to the CCN, indicating that the unit is

down. This alarm will clear when the variable is set back to

"enable."

T176 (4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure) — This alert indi-

cates a problem has been detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input.

The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA.

The reset function will be disabled when this occurs.

T177 (4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure)

—

This

alert indicates a problem has been detected with demand limit

4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA. The reset function will be disabled when

this occurs.

A151 (Illegal Configuration) — An A151 alarm indicates an

invalid configuration has been entered. The following are ille-

gal configurations.

• Invalid unit size has been entered.

T500, T501 (Current Sensor Board Failure — A xx Circuit

• Dual thermostat configured for single-circuit unit.

• Dual thermostat and switch demand limit configure

• AUX board incorrect revision.

T503, T504 (Current Sensor Board Failure — B xx Circuit

B) — Alert codes 500, 501, 503, and 504 are for compressors

A1, A2, B1, and B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the

output of the CSB is a constant high value. These alerts reset

automatically. If the problem cannot be resolved, the CSB must

be replaced.

• Unit configuration set to invalid type.

A152 (Unit Down Due to Failure) — Both circuits are off

due to alerts and/or alarms. Reset is automatic when all alarms

are cleared. This alarm indicates the unit is at 0% capacity.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES

Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS

EWT

LWT

SETP

CTPT

LOD.F

xxx.x ºF

xxx

Entering Fluid Temp

Leaving Fluid Temp

Active Set Point

Control Point

Load/Unload Factor

0=Service Test

1=Off Local

2=Off CCN

3=Off Time

4=Off Emrgcy

5=On Local

6=On CCN

7=On Time

STAT

Control Mode

VIEW

LD.PM

OCC

LS.AC

MODE

CAP

STGE

ALRM

TIME

Lead Pump

Occupied

YES/NO

xxx

Low Sound Active

Override Modes in Effect

Percent Total Capacity

Requested Stage

Current Alarms & Alerts

Time of Day

xx.xx

00:00-23:59

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MNTH

Month of Year

DATE

YEAR

Day of Month

Year of Century

01-31

UNIT RUN HOUR AND START

HRS.U

STR.U

HR.P1

HR.P2

xxxx HRS

xxxx

xxxx HRS

Machine Operating Hours

Machine Starts

RUN

Pump 1 Run Hours

Pump 2 Run Hours

CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS

HRS.A

HRS.B

HR.A1

HR.A2

HR.B1

HR.B2

xxxx HRS

Circuit A Run Hours

Circuit B Run Hours

Compressor A1 Run Hours

Compressor A2 Run Hours

Compressor B1 Run Hours

Compressor B2 Run Hours

HOUR

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

STRT

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

COMPRESSOR STARTS

ST.A1

ST.A2

ST.B1

ST.B2

xxxx

Compressor A1 Starts

Compressor A2 Starts

Compressor B1 Starts

Compressor B2 Starts

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

PUMP

SI.PM

PUMP MAINTENANCE

Pump Service Interval

Pump 1 Service Countdown

Pump 2 Service Countdown

Pump 1 Maintenance Done

Pump 2 Maintenance Done

PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

xxxx HRS

YES/NO

P.1.DN

P.2.DN

P.1.MN

P.2.MN

PMDT

P.1.M0

P.1.M1

P.1.M2

P.1.M3

P.1.M4

P.2.M0

P.2.M1

P.2.M2

P.2.M3

P.2.M4

STRN

User Entry

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

STRAINER MAINTENANCE

Strainer Srvc Interval

Strainer Srvc Countdown

Strainer Maint. Done

STRAINER MAINTENANCE DATES

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

SI.ST

xxxx HRS

YES/NO

S.T.DN

S.T.MN

ST.DT

S.T.M0

S.T.M1

S.T.M2

S.T.M3

S.T.M4

COIL

User Entry

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COIL MAINTENANCE

Coil Cleaning Srvc Int

Coil Service Countdown

Coil Cleaning Maint.Done

COIL MAINTENANCE DATES

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

SI.CL

xxxx HRS

YES/NO

C.L.DN

C.L.MN

CL.DT

C.L.M0

C.L.M1

C.L.M2

C.L.M3

C.L.M4

User Entry

MM/DD/YY HH:MM

SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS

CESR131460-XXXXX

MBB

EXV

AUX1

EMM

MARQ

NAVI

CESR131172-XXXXX

CESR131333-XXXXX

CESR131174-XXXXX

CESR131171-XXXXX

CESR130227-XXXXX

VERS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

TEST

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

To enable Service Test mode, move

Enable/Off/Remote contact switch to

OFF. Change TEST to ON.

Service Test Mode

Move switch to ENABLE

OUTPUTS

EXV % Open

Fan 1 Relay

Fan 2 Relay

Fan 3 Relay

Fan 4 Relay

Fan 5 Relay

Fan 6 Relay

EXV.A

EXV.B

FAN1

FAN2

FAN3

FAN4

FAN5

FAN6

V.HPA

V.HPB

CLP.1

CLP.2

UL.TM

CL.HT

RMT.A

xxx%

ON/OFF

OUTS

Var Head Press %

Cooler Pump Relay 1

Cooler Pump Relay 2

Comp A1 Unload Time

Cooler/Pump Heater

Remote Alarm Relay

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

Compressor A1 Relay

Comp A1 Unload Time

Compressor A2 Relay

Minimum Load Valve Relay

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST

Compressor B1 Relay

Compressor B2 Relay

ON/OFF

CC.A1

UL.TM

CC.A2

MLV

ON/OFF

CMPA

CMPB

CC.B1

CC.B2

ON/OFF

Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

UNIT

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

ENTERING AND LEAVING UNIT TEMPERATURES

CEWT

CLWT

OAT

SPT

DLWT

xxx.x °F

Cooler Entering Fluid

Cooler Leaving Fluid

Outside Air Temperature

Space Temperature

Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A

Saturated Condensing Tmp

Saturated Suction Temp

Compr Return Gas Temp

Discharge Gas Temp

Suction Superheat Temp

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B

Saturated Condensing Tmp

Saturated Suction Temp

Compr Return Gas Temp

Suction Superheat Temp

SCT.A

SST.A

RGT.A

D.GAS

SH.A

xxx.x °F

xxx.x ΔF

CIR.A

CIR.B

SCT.B

SST.B

RGT.B

SH.B

xxx.x °F

xxx.x ΔF

Pressures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

PRC.A

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

PRESSURES CIRCUIT A

xxx.x PSIG

DP.A

SP.A

Discharge Pressure

Suction Pressure

PRESSURES CIRCUIT B

PRC.B

DP.B

SP.B

xxx.x PSIG

Discharge Pressure

Suction Pressure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

COOL

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COOLING SET POINTS

Cooling Set Point 1

RANGE

COMMENT

CSP.1

CSP.2

CSP.3

xxx.x °F

–20 to 70

–20 to 32

Default: 44 F

Default: 32 F

Cooling Set Point 2

ICE Set Point

HEAD PRESSURE SET POINTS

Head Set Point

H.DP

F.ON

F.OFF

B.OFF

F.DLT

xxx.x °F

xx.x

85 to 120

Default: 95 F

Default: 72 F

Default: 23 F

Default: 15 F

Fan On Set Point

Fan Off Set Point

Base Fan Off Delta Temp

Fan Stage Delta

HEAD

FRZ

10 to 50

0 to 50

xxx

BRINE FREEZE SET POINT

Brine Freeze Point

BR.FZ

xx.x °F

–20 to 34

Default: 34 F

Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

GENERAL INPUTS

Start/Stop Switch

COMMENT

STST

FLOW

PM.F.1

PM.F.2

HT.RQ

DLS1

DLS2

ICED

DUAL

ON/OFF

Cooler Flow Switch

Cooler Pump 1 Interlock

Cooler Pump 2 Interlock

Heat Request

Demand Limit Switch 1

Demand Limit Switch 2

Ice Done

GEN.I

Dual Set Point Switch

CIRCUIT INPUTS

FKA1

FKA2

FKA3

FKA4

FKB1

FKB2

FKB3

FKB4

ON/OFF

Compressor A1 Feedback

Compressor A2 Feedback

Compressor A3 Feedback

Compressor A4 Feedback

Compressor B1 Feedback

Compressor B2 Feedback

Compressor B3 Feedback

Compressor B4 Feedback

CRCT

4-20

4-20 MA INPUTS

DMND

RSET

CSP

xx.x

4-20 ma Demand Signal

4-20 ma Reset Signal

4-20 ma Cooling Set Point

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

GENERAL OUTPUTS

FAN1

FAN2

FAN3

FAN4

FAN5

FAN6

V.HPA

V.HPB

C.WP1

C.WP2

CLHT

MLV.R

ON/OFF

Fan 1 Relay

Fan 2 Relay

Fan 3 Relay

Fan 4 Relay

Fan 5 Relay

GEN.O

Fan 6 Relay

Fan Speed Circuit A

Fan Speed Circuit B

Cooler Pump Relay 1

Cooler Pump Relay 2

Cooler/Pump Heater

Minimum Load Valve Relay

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

EXV.A

APPR

AP.SP

X.SH.R

S.SH.R

SH_R

OVR.A

SPH.A

ASH.S

AMP.S

PLM.A

SPR.1

ON/OFF

EXV % Open

Circuit A Approach

Approach Setpoint

SH Reset at Max Unl-Dig

Digload to Start SH RST

Amount of SH Reset

EXVA Override

Suction Superheat Temp

Active Superheat Setpt

Active Mop Setpt

A.EXV

ON/OFF

Cir A EXV Position Limit

Spare 1 Temperature

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

EXV.B

APPR

AP.SP

OVR.B

SPH.B

ASH.S

AMP.S

PLM.B

SPR.2

ON/OFF

EXV % Open

Circuit B Approach

Approach Setpoint

EXVB Override

B.EXV

Suction Superheat Temp

Active Superheat Setpt

Active Mop Setpt

Cir B EXV Position Limit

Spare 2 Temperature

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A

CC.A1

DPE.R

CC.A2

CC.A3

CC.A4

ON/OFF

Compressor A1 Relay

Comp A1 Load Percent

Compressor A2 Relay

Compressor A3 Relay

Compressor A4 Relay

CIR.A

CIR.B

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B

CC.B1

CC.B2

CC.B3

CC.B4

ON/OFF

Compressor B1 Relay

Compressor B2 Relay

Compressor B3 Relay

Compressor B4 Relay

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

DISP

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

Test Display LEDs

COMMENT

TEST

METR

ON/OFF

Metric Display

Off = English On = Metric

Default: 0

0 = English

1 = Espanol

2 = Francais

3 = Portuguese

LANG

Language Selection

PAS.E

PASS

ENBL/DSBL

XXXX

Password Enable

Service Password

UNIT CONFIGURATION

Unit Size

SIZE

SZA.1

SZA.2

SZA.3

SZA.4

SZB.1

SZB.2

SZB.3

SZB.4

SH.SP

FAN.S

EXV

Compressor A1 Size

Compressor A2 Size

Compressor A3 Size

Compressor A4 Size

Compressor B1 Size

Compressor B2 Size

Compressor B3 Size

Compressor B4 Size

Suction Superheat Setpt

Number of Fans

UNIT

Default: 5

YES/NO

EXV Module Installed

Compressor A1 Digital

A1.TY

Default: No

Default: 7

MAX.T

FLUD

Maximum A1 Unload Time

Max = 12 (010,015)

Max = 10 (018-060)

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

Cooler Fluid

Default: Water

1 = Water

2 = Medium Temperature Brine

MLV.S

CSB.E

CPC

PM1E

PM2E

PM.P.S

PM.SL

YES/NO

ENBL/DSBL

ON/OFF

YES/NO

Minimum Load Valve Select

Csb Boards Enable

Default: Enable

Default: Off

Cooler Pump Control

Cooler Pump 1 Enable

Cooler Pump 2 Enable

Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt

Cooler Pump Select

Default: No

OPT1

Default: Automatic

0 = Automatic

1 = Pump 1 Starts first

2 = Pump 2 Starts first

PM.DY

PM.DT

ROT.P

EMM

CND.T

MOPS

APPR

XX MIN

XXXX HRS

YES/NO

Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly

Pump Changeover Hours

Rotate Cooler Pumps Now

EMM Module Installed

Cnd HX Typ:0=RTPF 1=MCHX

EXV MOP Set Point

0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1 min.

Default: 500 hours

User Entry

Config Approach Set Point

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

Default: 0

0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch

2 = Occupancy

CTRL

LOAD

LLCS

Control Method

3 = CCN Control

Default: 1

1 = Equal

2 = Staged

Loading Sequence Select

Lead/Lag Circuit Select

Default: 1

1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

Default: 60

OPT2

LCWT

DELY

High LCW Alert Limit

Minutes Off Time

Range: 2 to 60 F

Default: 0 Minutes

Range: 0 to 15 Minutes

ICE.M

LS.MD

ENBL/DSBL

Ice Mode Enable

Low Sound Mode Select

Default: Disable

Default: 0

0 = Mode Disable

1 = Fan Noise Only

2 = Fan/Compressor Noise

LS.ST

LS.ND

00:00

Low Sound Start Time

Low Sound End Time

Default: 00:00

Default: 100%

LS.LT

XXX %

Low Sound Capacity Limit

CCN NETWORK CONFIGS

CCN Address

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 1

Range: 0 to 239

Default: 1

Range: 0 to 239

CCNA

CCNB

XXX

CCN Bus Number

CCN

Default: 3

1 = 2400

2 = 4800

3 = 9600

4 =19,200

5 =38,400

BAUD

CCN Baud Rate

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA

SCT Delta For Comp A1

Default:12

A1.DT

A2.DT

HP.A

HP.B

Range: 0 to 50

Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

SCT Delta For Comp A2

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA

SCT Delta For Comp B1

Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

B1.DT

B2.DT

SCT Delta For Comp B2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

Default: 50

0 to 100

STR.A

XXX

EXV CIrc.A Start Pos

Default: 8

0 to 100

0 to 65535

Default: 200

0 to 65535

MIN.A

RNG.A

SPD.A

XXX

EXV Circ.A Min Position

EXVA Steps In Range

EXVA STeps Per Second

XXXXX

Default: 0

0 to 100

POF.A

XXX

EXVA Fail Position In %

Default: 0

MIN.A

MAX.A

OVR.A

XXXXX

XXX

EXVA Minimum Steps

EXVA Maximum Steps

EXVA Overrun Steps

0 to 65535

Default: 167

0 to 65535

Default: 1

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR

EXV.A

TYP.A

0,1

EXVA Stepper Type

Default: 115

50 to 140

Default: 10

0 to 30

Default: 5

0 to 30

Default: 10

0 to 100

Default: 10

0 to 100

Default: 10

0 to 100

Default: 10

0 to 100

H.SCT

X.PCT

X.PER

A.PCT

M.PCT

S.PCT

DELY

XXX

High SCT Threshold

Open EXV X% On 2nd Comp

Move EXV X% On DISCRSOL

Pre-open EXV - Fan Adding

Pre-close EXV - Fan Sub

Pre-close EXV - Lag Shut

XXX

Lag Start Delay

CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION

EXV CIrc.B Start Pos

Default: 50

0 to 100

STR.B

XXX

Default: 8

0 to 100

0 to 65535

Default: 200

0 to 65535

MIN.B

RNG.B

SPD.B

XXX

EXV Circ.B Min Position

EXVB Steps In Range

EXVB STeps Per Second

XXXXX

Default: 0

0 to 100

EXV.B

POF.B

XXX

EXVB Fail Position In %

Default: 0

MIN.B

MAX.B

OVR.B

XXXXX

XXX

EXVB Minimum Steps

EXVB Maximum Steps

EXVB Overrun Steps

0 to 65535

Default: 167

0 to 65535

Default: 1

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR

TYP.B

0,1

EXVB Stepper Type

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

MOTORMASTER

COMMENT

MMR.S

P.GAN

YES/NO

Motormaster Select

Default: NO

Default: 1

Range: 1 to 4

Default: 0.1

Range: -20 to 20

Head Pressure P Gain

I.GAN

XX.X

Head Pressure I Gain

Default: 0.0

D.GAN

MIN.S

XX.X

Head Pressure D Gain

Minimum Fan Speed

Range: -20 to 20

Default: 5

RESET COOL TEMP

Default: 0

0 = No Reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input

2 = Outdoor Air Temperature

3 = Return Fluid

CRST

Cooling Reset Type

4 = Space Temperature

Default: 0.0 ΔF

MA.DG

RM.NO

RM.F

XX.XΔF

XXX.X °F

XX.X °F

XXX.XΔF

XX.X °F

4-20 - Degrees Reset

Remote - No Reset Temp

Remote - Full Reset Temp

Remote - Degrees Reset

Return - No Reset Temp

Return - Full Reset Temp

Return - Degrees Reset

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

Default: 125 F

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0 F

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

Default: 10.0 ΔF

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0 ΔF

Range: 0° to125 F

Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

RM.DG

RT.NO

RT.F

RT.DG

Default: 0

0 = None

DMDC

Demand Limit Select

1 = Switch

2 - 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = CCN Loadshed

Default: 100%

RSET

DM20

SHNM

SHDL

SHTM

DLS1

DLS2

XXX%

XXX

Demand Limit at 20 mA

Loadshed Group Number

Loadshed Demand Delta

Maximum Loadshed Time

Demand Limit Switch 1

Demand Limit Switch 2

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 0

Range: 0 to 99

Default: 0%

Range: 0 to 60%

XXX%

XXX

Default: 60 minutes

Range: 0 to 120 minutes

Default: 80%

Range: 0 to 100%

Default: 50%

Range: 0 to 100%

XXX%

LLEN

MSSL

SLVA

ENBL/DSBL

SLVE/MAST

XXX

Lead/Lag Chiller Enable

Master/Slave Select

Slave Address

Default: Disable

Default: Master

Default: 2

Range: 0 to 239

Default: Master Leads

0 = Master Leads

1 = Slave Leads

2 = Automatic

LLBL

Lead/Lag Balance Select

Default: 168 hours

LLBD

LLDY

PARA

XXX

YES

Lead/Lag Balance Delta

Lag Start Delay

Range: 40 to 400 hours

Default: 5 minutes

Range: 0 to 30 minutes

Default: YES (CANNOT BE

CHANGED)

Parallel Configuration

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

Default: Single

0 = Single

1 = Dual Switch

CLSP

Cooling Set Point Select

2 = Dual CCN Occupied

3 = 4 to 20 mA

Input (requires EMM)

SLCT

RL.S

ENBL/DSBL

Ramp Load Select

Default: Enable

Default: 1.0

Range: 0.3 to 2

CRMP

Cooling Ramp Loading

Default: 1

SCHD

Z.GN

Schedule Number

Range: 1 to 99

Default: 1

Range: 1 to 4

X.X

Deadband Multiplier

SERVICE CONFIGURATION

Enable Compressor A1

Enable Compressor A2

Enable Compressor B1

Enable Compressor B2

BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

CCN Time/Date Broadcast

CCN OAT Broadcast

EN.A1

EN.A2

EN.B1

EN.B2

YES/NO

SERV

BCST

T.D.B

OAT.B

G.S.BC

BC.AK

ON/OFF

Global Schedule Broadcst

CCN Broadcast Ack'er

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

TIME

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

TIME OF DAY

Hour and Minute

COMMENT

HH.MM

XX.XX

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND YEAR

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

Range: 01 -31

1 - 7 (1 = Sunday,

2 = Monday, etc.)

MNTH

DOM

DAY

Month of Year

DATE

Day of Month

Day of Week

YEAR

XXXX

Year of Century

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

STR.M

STR.W

STR.D

MIN.A

STP.M

STP.W

STP.D

MIN.S

Month

Week

Day

Default: 4 Range 1- 12

Default: 1 Range 1- 5

Default: 7 Range 1- 7

Default: 60 Range 0 - 99

Default: 10 Range 1- 12

Default: 5 Range 1- 5

Default: 7 Range 1- 7

Default: 60 Range 0 - 99

DST

Minutes to Add

Month

Week

Day

Minutes to Subtract

HOL.L

HD.01

LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01

MON

DAY

LEN

Holiday Start Month

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 02

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

HD.02

HD.03

HD.04

HD.05

HD.06

HD.07

HD.08

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 03

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 04

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 05

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 06

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 07

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 08

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

01-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

HD.09

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 09

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

01-31

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 10

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

HD.10

HD.11

HD.12

HD.13

HD.14

HD.15

HD.16

HD.17

HD.18

HD.19

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 11

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 13

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 14

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 15

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 16

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 17

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 18

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 19

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

01-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

HD.20

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 20

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

01-31

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 21

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

HD.21

HD.22

HD.23

HD.24

HD.25

HD.26

HD.27

HD.28

HD.29

HD.30

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 22

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 23

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 24

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 25

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 26

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 27

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 28

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 29

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 30

01-31

1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

MON

Holiday Start Month

DAY

LEN

Start Day

Duration (days)

01-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

SCH.N

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

Schedule Number 0

COMMENT

SCH.L

LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1

OCC.1

UNC.1

MON.1

TUE.1

WED.1

THU.1

FRI.1

SAT.1

SUN.1

HOL.1

XX:XX

Period Occupied Time

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

YES/NO

PER.1

PER.2

PER.3

PER.4

PER.5

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2

XX:XX

OCC.2

UNC.2

MON.2

TUE.2

WED.2

THU.2

FRI.2

SAT.2

SUN.2

HOL.2

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

YES/NO

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3

XX:XX

OCC.3

UNC.3

MON.3

TUE.3

WED.3

THU.3

FRI.3

SAT.3

SUN.3

HOL.3

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

YES/NO

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4

XX:XX

OCC.4

UNC.4

MON.4

TUE.4

WED.4

THU.4

FRI.4

SAT.4

SUN.4

HOL.4

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

YES/NO

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5

XX:XX

OCC.5

UNC.5

MON.5

TUE.5

WED.5

THU.5

FRI.5

SAT.5

SUN.5

HOL.5

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

YES/NO

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6

OCC.6

UNC.6

MON.6

TUE.6

WED.6

THU.6

FRI.6

SAT.6

SUN.6

HOL.6

XX:XX

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

YES/NO

PER.6

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7

OCC.7

UNC.7

MON.7

TUE.7

WED.7

THU.7

FRI.7

SAT.7

SUN.7

HOL.7

XX:XX

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

YES/NO

PER.7

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8

OCC.8

UNC.8

MON.8

TUE.8

WED.8

THU.8

FRI.8

SAT.8

SUN.8

HOL.8

XX:XX

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Military (00:00 - 23:59)

YES/NO

PER.8

Saturday In Period

Sunday In Period

Holiday In Period

SCHEDULE OVERRIDE

OVR.T

OVR.L

T.OVR

Timed Override Hours

Override Time Limit

Timed Override

Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours

User Entry

OVR

YES/NO

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

CSM Controlling Chiller

WSM Controlling Chiller

Master/Slave Control

Ramp Load Limited

COMMENT

MD01

MD02

MD03

MD05

MD06

MD07

MD08

MD09

MD10

MD13

MD14

MD15

MD16

MD17

MD18

MD19

MD20

MD21

MD22

MD23

MD24

MD25

ON/OFF

Timed Override in effect

Low Cooler Suction TempA

Low Cooler Suction TempB

Slow Change Override

Minimum OFF time active

Dual Set Point

Temperature Reset

Demand Limited

Cooler Freeze Protection

Low Temperature Cooling

High Temperature Cooling

Making Ice

MODE

Storing Ice

High SCT Circuit A

High SCT Circuit B

Minimum Comp. On Time

Pump Off Delay Time

Low Sound Mode

Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE

CRNT

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMMENT

CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS

AXXX

TXXX

PXXX

Alarms are hown as AXXX

Alerts are shown as TXXX

Current Alarms 1-25

RCRN

YES/NO

Reset All Current Alarms

ALARM HISTORY

AXXX

TXXX

PXXX

HIST

Alarms are shown as AXXX

Alerts are shown as TXXX

Alarm History 1-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — A_UNIT (General Unit Parameters)

DESCRIPTION

Control Mode

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

STAT

FORCIBLE

0 = Test

1 = Local Off

2 = CCN Off

3 = Clock Off

4 = Emergency Stop

5 = Local On

6 = CCN On

7 = Clock On

8 = Heat Enabled

9 = Pump Delay

Occupied

CCN Chiller

Low Sound Active

Alarm State

Active Demand Limit

Override Modes in Effect

Percent Total Capacity

Requested Stage

Active Set Point

No/Yes

Start/Stop

No/Yes

Normal/Alert/Alarm

0 to 100

No/Yes

0 to 100

0 to 99

–20 to 70

snnn.n

OCC

CHIL_S_S

LSACTIVE

ALM

DEM_LIM

MODE

CAP_T

STAGE

CTRL_PNT

EWT

F

Enable

minutes

Control Point

Entering Fluid Temp

Leaving Fluid Temp

Emergency Stop

Minutes Left for Start

PUMPS

snnn.n

Enable/Emstop

00:00 to 15:00

LWT

EMSTOP

MIN_LEFT

Cooler Pump Relay 1

Cooler Pump Relay 2

Cooler Pump 1 Interlock

Cooler Pump 2 Interlock

Cooler Flow Switch

Lead Pump

Off/On

Open/Close

COOLPMP1

COOLPMP2

PMP1_FBK

PMP2_FBK

COOLFLOW

LEADPUMP

ROT_PUMP

Rotate Cooler Pumps Now

No/Yes

Heat/Cool Select

Heat/Cool

HC_SEL

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters)

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES

Percent Total Capacity

Percent Available Cap.

Discharge Pressure

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

0-100

CAPA_T

CAPA_A

DP_A

SP_A

HSP

TMP_SCTA

TMP_SSTA

EXV_A

VHP_ACT

TMP_RGTA

DISGAS

SH_A

0-100

nnn.n

snnn.n

nnn

nnn.n

PSIG

°F

F

Suction Pressure

Head Setpoint

Saturated Condensing Tmp

Saturated Suction Temp

EXV % Open

Var Head Press Output

Compr Return Gas Temp

Discharge Gas Temp

Suction Superheat Temp

Spare 1 Temperature

milliamps

F

°F

F

°F

SPR1_TMP

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs)

DESCRIPTION

CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS

Compressor A1 Relay

Compressor A2 Relay

Minimum Load Valve Relay

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

On/Off

K_A1_RLY

K_A2_RLY

MLV_RLY

CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS

Compressor A1 Feedback

Compressor A2 Feedback

On/Off

K_A1_FBK

K_A2_FBK

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCB_AN (Circuit B Analog Parameters)

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES

Percent Total Capacity

Percent Available Cap.

Discharge Pressure

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

0-100

CAPB_T

CAPB_A

DP_B

SP_B

HSP

TMP_SCTB

TMP_SSTB

EXV_B

VHP_ACT

TMP_RGTB

SH_B

0-100

nnn.n

snnn.n

nnn

nnn.n

PSIG

°F

F

Suction Pressure

Head Setpoint

Saturated Condensing Tmp

Saturated Suction Temp

EXV % Open

Var Head Press Output

Compr Return Gas Temp

Suction Superheat Temp

Spare 2 Temperature

milliamps

F

F

°F

SPR2_TMP

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCBDIO (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs)

DESCRIPTION

CIRC. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS

Compressor B1 Relay

Compressor B2 Relay

Minimum Load Valve Relay

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

On/Off

K_B1_RLY

K_B2_RLY

MLV_RLY

CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS

Compressor B1 Feedback

Compressor B2 Feedback

On/Off

K_B1_FBK

K_B2_FBK

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — OPTIONS (Unit Parameters)

DESCRIPTION

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

FORCIBLE

FANS

Fan 1 Relay

Fan 2 Relay

Cooler/Pump Heater

Off/On

FAN_1

FAN_2

COOL_HTR

UNIT ANALOG VALUES

Cooler Entering Fluid

Cooler Leaving Fluid

Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

snnn.n

F

COOL_EWT

COOL_LWT

DUAL_LWT

TEMPERATURE RESET

4-20 mA Reset Signal

Outside Air Temperature

Space Temperature

nn.n

snnn.n

F

RST_MA

OAT

SPT

DEMAND LIMIT

4-20 mA Demand Signal

Demand Limit Switch 1

Demand Limit Switch 2

CCN Loadshed Signal

nn.n

Off/On

0 = Normal

1 = Redline

2 = Loadshed

LMT_MA

DMD_SW1

DMD_SW2

DL_STAT

MISCELLANEOUS

Heat Request

Dual Setpoint Switch

Cooler LWT Setpoint

Ice Done

Off/On

snnn.n

Off/On

HEAT_REQ

DUAL_IN

LWT_SP

F

ICE_DONE

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — UNIT (Unit Configuration)

DESCRIPTION

Unit Size

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

tons

POINT NAME

SIZE

nnn

nn.n

Compressor A1 Size

Compressor A2 Size

Compressor B1 Size

Compressor B2 Size

Suction Superheat Setpt

Number of Fans

SIZE_A1

SIZE_A2

SIZE_B1

SIZE_B2

SH_SP

FAN_TYPE

CPA1TYPE

MAXULTME

tons

F

9.0

Compressor A1 Digital?

Maximum A1 Unload Time

No/Yes

sec

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS1 (Options 1 Configuration)

DESCRIPTION

Cooler Fluid

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

FLUIDTYP

1 = Water

2 = Med. Brine

No/Yes

Dsable/Enable

Off/On

No/Yes

0 = Automatic, 1 =

Pump 1, 2 = Pump 2

Minimum Load Vlv Select

CSB Board Enable

MLV_FLG

CSB_ENA

CPC

PMP1_ENA

PMP2_ENA

PUMP_PST

PMP_SLCT

Enable

Off

Cooler Pump Control

Cooler Pump 1 Enable

Cooler Pump 2 Enable

Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt

Cooler Pump Select

Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly

Pump Changeover Hours

EMM Module Installed

Cnd HX Typ: 0=RTPF 1=MCHX

EXV MOP Set Point

0 to 10

10 to 2000

No/Yes

0/1

nn.n

minutes

hours

PUMP_DLY

PMP_DLTA

EMM_BRD

COILTYPE

MOP_SP

100

°F

Config Approach Setpoint

IAPPROSP

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS2 (Options 2 Configuration)

DESCRIPTION

Control Method

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

CONTROL

0 = Switch

2 = Occupancy

3 = CCN

Loading Sequence Select

Lead/Lag Circuit Select

1 = Equal Loading

2 = Staged Loading

1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

SEQ_TYP

LEAD_TYP

Cooling Setpoint Select

0 = Single

CLSP_TYP

1 = Dual, remote switch controlled

2 = Dual CCN occupancy

3 = 4-20 mA input

Ramp Load Select

Heat Cool Select

High LCW Alert Limit

Minutes off time

Enable/Dsable

Cool/Heat

2 to 60

Enable

Cool

60.0

RAMP_EBL

HEATCOOL

LCW_LMT

DELAY

F

min

0 to 15

Deadband Multiplier

Ice Mode Enable

Low Sound Mode Select

1.0 to 4.0

Enable/Dsable

1.0

Dsable

Z_GAIN

ICE_CNFG

LS_MODE

0 = Disabled

1 = Fan only

2 = Capacity/Fans

Low Sound Start Time

Low Sound End Time

Low Sound Capacity Limit

00:00 to 23:59

0 to 100

00:00

100

LS_START

LS_END

LS_LIMIT

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — SCHEDOVR (Timed Override Setup)

DESCRIPTION

Schedule Number

Override Time Limit

Timed Override Hours

Timed Override

VALUE

0 to 99

0 to 4

No/Yes

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

SCHEDNUM

OTL

OVR_EXT

TIMEOVER

hours

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — RESETCON (Temperature Reset and Demand Limit)

DESCRIPTION

COOLING RESET

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

Cooling Reset Type

0 = No Reset

CRST_TYP

1 = 4-20 mA input

2 = External temp – OAT

3 = Return Fluid

4 = External temp - SPT

4-20 MA RESET

4-20 – Degrees Reset

–30 to 30

0.0

F

420_DEG

REMOTE RESET

Remote – No Reset Temp

Remote – Full Reset Temp

Remote – Degrees Reset

0 to 125

–30 to 30

125.0

0.0

F

F

REM_NO

REM_FULL

REM_DEG

RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET

Return – No Reset Temp

Return – Full Reset Temp

Return – Degrees Reset

0 to 125

–30 to 30

10.0

0.0

F

RTN_NO

RTN_FULL

RTN_DEG

DEMAND LIMIT

Demand Limit Select

0 = None

DMD_CTRL

1 = External switch input

2 = 4-20 mA input

3 = Loadshed

Demand Limit at 20 mA

Loadshed Group Number

Loadshed Demand Delta

Maximum Loadshed Time

Demand Limit Switch 1

Demand Limit Switch 2

0 to 100

0 to 99

0 to 60

0 to 120

0 to 100

100

DMT20MA

SHED_NUM

SHED_DEL

SHED_TIM

DLSWSP1

DLSWSP2

minutes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DUALCHIL (Dual Chiller Configuration Settings)

DESCRIPTION

LEAD/LAG

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

Lead/Lag Chiller Enable

Master/Slave Select

Slave Address

Lead/Lag Balance Select

Lead/Lag Balance Delta

Lag Start Delay

Enable/Dsable

Master/Slave

0 to 239

0 = None

40 to 400

0 to 30

Dsable

Master

168

Yes

LL_ENA

MS_SEL

SLV_ADDR

LL_BAL

LL_BAL_D

LL_DELAY

PARALLEL

hours

minutes

Parallel Configuration

Yes

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DISPLAY (Marquee Display SETUP)

DESCRIPTION

Service Password

Password Enable

Metric Display

VALUE

DEFAULT

1111

Enable

Off

UNITS

POINT NAME

PASSWORD

PASS_EBL

DISPUNIT

nnnn

Enable/Disable

Off/On

Language Selection

0 = ENGLISH

LANGUAGE

1 = FRANCAIS

2 = ESPANOL

3 = PORTUGUES

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVACONF (EXV Circuit A Configuration)

DESCRIPTION

VALUE

nnn.n

DEFAULT

UNITS

steps

POINT NAME

EXVASTRT

EXVAMINP

EVXARANG

EXVARATE

EXVAPOSF

EXVAMINS

EXVAMAXS

EXVAOVRS

EXVATYPE

HIGH_SCT

EXV_HSCT

EXVDISCR

EXV_AFAN

EXV_MFAN

EXV_SLAG

DELAYLAG

EXV Circ. A Start Pos

EXV Circ. A Min Position

EXVA Steps in Range

EXVA Steps Per Second

EXVA Fail Position in %

EXVA Minimum Steps

EXVA Maximum Steps

EXVA Overrun Steps

50.0

8.0

1596/2500

nnn.n

nnnnn

nnnn.nn

nnnnn

nnn

nnn.n

nnn

200

1596/2500

167

Bipolar

115

EXVA Stepper Type

High SCT Threshold

°F

Open EXV X% on 2nd Comp

Open EXV X% on DISCRSOL

Pre-Open EXV - Fan Adding

Pre-Close EXV - Fan Sub

Pre-Close EXV - Lag Shut

Lag Start Delay

secs

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVBCONF (EXV Circuit B Configuration)

DESCRIPTION

EXV Circ. B Start Pos

VALUE

nnn.n

DEFAULT

50.0

8.0

1596/2500

200

UNITS

steps

POINT NAME

EXVBSTRT

EXVBMINP

EVXBRANG

EXVBRATE

EXVBPOSF

EXVBMINS

EXVBMAXS

EXVBOVRS

EXVBTYPE

EXV Circ. B Min Position

EXVB Steps in Range

EXVB Steps Per Second

EXVB Fail Position in %

EXVB Minimum Steps

EXVB Maximum Steps

EXVB Overrun Steps

EXVB Stepper Type

nnn.n

nnnnn

nnnn.nn

nnnnn

nnn

1596/2500

167

Bipolar

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — MM_CONF (Motormaster Configuration)

DESCRIPTION

Motormaster Select

Head Pressure P Gain

Head Pressure I Gain

Head Pressure D Gain

Minimum Fan Speed

VALUE

No/Yes

nnn.n

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

MM_SLCT

HP_PGAIN

HP_IGAIN

HP_DGAIN

MIN_VHP

1.0

0.1

0.0

5.0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN SERVICE TABLES — SERVICE

DESCRIPTION

SERVICE

Brine Freeze Point

Pump Service Interval

COMPRESSOR ENABLE

Enable Compressor A1

Enable Compressor A2

Enable Compressor B1

Enable Compressor B2

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

F

POINT NAME

nnn.n

nnnnn

BRN_FRZ

SI_PUMPS

hours

Disable/Enable

ENABLEA1

ENABLEA2

ENABLEB1

ENABLEB2

CCN SETPOINT TABLES — SETPOINT

DESCRIPTION

COOLING

VALUE

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

Cooling Setpoint 1

Cooling Setpoint 2

ICE Setpoint

–20 to 70

–20 to 32

44.0

32.0

F

CSP1

CSP2

CSP3

RAMP LOADING

Cooling Ramp Loading

0.2 to 2.0

–20 to 34

1.0

CRAMP

Brine Freeze Point

Head Setpoint

Fan On Set Point

Fan Off Set Point

Fan Stage Delta

34.0

F

BRN_FRZ

HSP

FANONSP

FANOFFSP

FSTGDLTA

B_FANOFF

Base Fan Off Delta Temp

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRA_EXV

DESCRIPTION

EXV % Open

VALUE

nnn

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

EXV_A

Circuit A Approach

Approach Setpoint

EXVA Override

Suction Superheat Temp

Active Superheat Setpt

Active MOP Setpt

nnn.n

nnnnn

nnn.n

nn.n

delta F

CIRA_APP

APPRA_SP

EXVAOVRR

SH_A

ACTSH_SP

ACMOP_SP

PLMA

delta F

nn.n

nnn

Cir A EXV Position Limit

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRB_EXV

DESCRIPTION

EXV % Open

VALUE

nnn

DEFAULT

UNITS

POINT NAME

EXV_B

Circuit B Approach

Approach Setpoint

EXVB Override

Suction Superheat Temp

Active Superheat Setpt

Active MOP Setpt

nnn.n

nnnnn

nnn.n

nn.n

delta F

CIRB_APP

APPRB_SP

EXVBOVRR

SH_B

ACTSH_SP

ACMOP_SP

PLMB

delta F

nn.n

nnn

Cir B EXV Position Limit

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — STRTHOUR

DESCRIPTION

Machine Operating Hours

Machine Starts

VALUE

nnnnnn

UNITS

hours

POINT NAME

HR_MACH

CY_MACH

Circuit A Run Hours

nnnnnn

hours

HR_CIRA

HR_A1

HR_A2

HR_CIRB

HR_B1

HR_B2

Compressor A1 Run Hours

Compressor A2 Run Hours

Circuit B Run Hours

Compressor B1 Run Hours

Compressor B2 Run Hours

Circuit A Starts

nnnnnn

CY_CIRA

CY_A1

CY_A2

CY_CIRB

CY_B1

CY_B2

Compressor A1 Starts

Compressor A2 Starts

Circuit B Starts

Compressor B1 Starts

Compressor B2 Starts

PUMP HOURS

Pump 1 Run Hours

Pump 2 Run Hours

nnnnnn

hours

HR_PUMP1

HR_PUMP2

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CURRMODS

DESCRIPTION

CSM controlling Chiller

WSM controlling Chiller

Master/Slave control

Ramp Load Limited

Timed Override in effect

Low Cooler Suction TempA

Low Cooler Suction TempB

Slow Change Override

Minimum OFF time active

Dual Setpoint

VALUE

POINT NAME

On/Off

MODE_1

MODE_2

MODE_3

MODE_5

MODE_6

MODE_7

MODE_8

MODE_9

MODE_10

MODE_13

MODE_14

MODE_15

MODE_16

MODE_17

MODE_18

MODE_19

MODE_20

MODE_21

MODE_22

MODE_23

MODE_24

MODE_25

Temperature Reset

Demand/Sound Limited

Cooler Freeze Protection

Low Temperature Cooling

High Temperature Cooling

Making ICE

Storing ICE

High SCT Circuit A

High SCT Circuit B

Minimum Comp. On Time

Pump Off Delay Time

Low Sound Mode

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — ALARMS

DESCRIPTION

Active Alarm #1

VALUE

Axxx or Txxx

POINT NAME

ALARM01C

Active Alarm #2

Active Alarm #3

Active Alarm #4

Active Alarm #5

Active Alarm #6

Active Alarm #7

Active Alarm #8

Active Alarm #9

Active Alarm #10

Active Alarm #11

Active Alarm #12

Active Alarm #13

Active Alarm #14

Active Alarm #15

Active Alarm #16

Active Alarm #17

Active Alarm #18

Active Alarm #19

Active Alarm #20

Active Alarm #21

Active Alarm #22

Active Alarm #23

Active Alarm #24

Active Alarm #25

ALARM02C

ALARM03C

ALARM04C

ALARM05C

ALARM06C

ALARM07C

ALARM08C

ALARM09C

ALARM10C

ALARM11C

ALARM12C

ALARM13C

ALARM14C

ALARM15C

ALARM16C

ALARM17C

ALARM18C

ALARM19C

ALARM20C

ALARM21C

ALARM22C

ALARM23C

ALARM24C

ALARM25C

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — VERSIONS

DESCRIPTION

VERSION

CESR131172-

CESR131333-

CESR131460-

CESR131174-

CESR131171-

CESR130227-

VALUE

EXV

AUX

MBB

EMM

MARQUEE

NAVIGATOR

nn-nn

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — LOADFACT

DESCRIPTION

VALUE

UNITS

POINT NAME

CAPACITY CONTROL

Load/Unload Factor

Control Point

Entering Fluid Temp

Leaving Fluid Temp

snnn.n

SMZ

CTRL_PNT

EWT

snnn.n

F

LWT

Ramp Load Limited

On/Off

MODE_5

MODE_9

MODE_16

MODE_17

MODE_18

MODE_23

Slow Change Override

Cooler Freeze Protection

Low Temperature Cooling

High Temperature Cooling

Minimum Comp. On Time

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-PUMP

DESCRIPTION

Pump Service Interval

VALUE

nnnnnn

Yes/No

nnnnnn

Yes/No

UNITS

hours

POINT NAME

SI_PUMPS

Pump 1 Service Countdown

Pump 1 Maintenance Done

Pump 2 Service Countdown

Pump 2 Maintenance Done

Pump 1 Maintenance Date

Pump 2 Maintenance Date

P1_CDOWN

P1_MAINT

P2_CDOWN

P2_MAINT

PMP1_PM0

PMP1_PM1

PMP1_PM2

PMP1_PM3

PMP1_PM4

PMP2_PM0

PMP2_PM1

PMP2_PM2

PMP2_PM3

PMP2_PM4

hours

mm/dd/yy hh:mm

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-STRN

DESCRIPTION

Strainer Srvc Interval

Strainer Srvc Countdown

Strainer Maint. Done

Strainer Maint. Date

VALUE

nnnnnn

UNITS

hours

POINT NAME

SI_STRNR

ST_CDOWN

ST_MAINT

STRN_PM0

STRN_PM1

STRN_PM2

STRN_PM3

STRN_PM4

Yes/No

mm/dd/yy hh:mm

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-COIL

DESCRIPTION

Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter

Coil Service Countdown

Coil Cleaning Maint.Done

Coil Cleaning Maint.Date

VALUE

nnnnnn

UNITS

hours

POINT NAME

SI_COIL

CL_CDOWN

CL_MAINT

COIL_PM0

COIL_PM1

COIL_PM2

COIL_PM3

COIL_PM4

Yes/No

mm/dd/yy hh:mm

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — TESTMODE

DESCRIPTION

Service Test Mode

Compressor A1 Relay

Compressor A2 Relay

Compressor B1 Relay

Compressor B2 Relay

Fan 1 Relay

VALUE

On/Off

UNITS

POINT NAME

NET_CTRL

S_A1_RLY

S_A2_RLY

S_B1_RLY

S_B2_RLY

S_FAN_1

S_FAN_2

S_CLPMP1

S_CLPMP2

S_A1ULTM

S_MLV

Fan 2 Relay

Cooler Pump Relay 1

Cooler Pump Relay 2

Comp A1 Unload Time

Minimum Load Valve Relay

Remote Alarm Relay

EXV % Open

sec

On/Off

S_ALM

S_EXV_A

S_EXV_B

EXV % Open

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — RUNTEST

DESCRIPTION

Percent Total Capacity

VALUE

nnn

UNITS

POINT NAME

CAPA_T

Percent Available Cap.

Discharge Pressure

Suction Pressure

nnn

CAPA_A

DP_A

SP_A

nnn.n

On/Off

nnn

psig

F

Head Setpoint

HSP

Saturated Condensing Tmp

Saturated Suction Temp

Compr Return Gas Temp

Discharge Gas Temp

Suction Superheat Temp

Compressor A1 Relay

Compressor A2 Relay

Minimum Load Valve Relay

Compressor A1 Feedback

Compressor A2 Feedback

Percent Total Capacity

Percent Available Cap.

Discharge Pressure

TMP_SCTA

TMP_SSTA

TMP_RGTA

DISGAS

SH_A

K_A1_RLY

K_A2_RLY

MLV_RLY

K_A1_FBK

K_A2_FBK

CAPB_T

CAPB_A

DP_B

psig

F

nnn

nnn.n

On/Off

Suction Pressure

Head Setpoint

SP_B

HSP

Saturated Condensing Tmp

Saturated Suction Temp

Compr Return Gas Temp

Suction Superheat Temp

Compressor B1 Relay

Compressor B2 Relay

Minimum Load Valve Relay

TMP_SCTB

TMP_SSTB

TMP_RGTB

SH_B

K_B1_RLY

K_B2_RLY

MLV_RLY

Compressor B1 Feedback

Compressor B2 Feedback

Fan 1 Relay

On/Off

K_B1_FBK

K_B2_FBK

FAN_1

Fan 2 Relay

FAN_2

Outside Air Temperature

Space Temperature

Cooler Pump Relay 1

Cooler Pump Relay 2

Cooler Pump 1 Interlock

Cooler Pump 2 Interlock

Cooler Entering Fluid

Cooler Leaving Fluid

Compressor A1 Size

Compressor A2 Size

Compressor B1 Size

Compressor B2 Size

Cooler Flow Switch

nnn.n

F

OAT

SPT

On/Off

Open/Closed

nnn.n

COOLPMP1

COOLPMP2

PMP1_FBK

PMP2_FBK

COOL_EWT

COOL_LWT

SIZE_A1

SIZE_A2

SIZE_B1

SIZE_B2

COOLFLOW

F

tons

nnn.n

nnn

On/Off

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — DUALCHIL

DESCRIPTION

Dual Chiller Link Good?

VALUE

Yes/No

UNITS

POINT NAME

DC_LINK

Master Chiller Role

Stand Alone,

Lead Chiller,

Lag Chiller

Stand Alone,

Lead Chiller,

Lag Chiller

MC_ROLE

SC_ROLE

Slave Chiller Role

Lead Chiller Ctrl Point

Lag Chiller Ctrl Point

Control Point

snnn.n

F

LEAD_CP

LAG_CP

CTRL_PNT

Cool EnteringFluid-Slave

Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave

Cooler Entering Fluid

Cooler Leaving Fluid

snnn.n

F

COOLEWTS

COOLLWTS

COOL_EWT

COOL_LWT

DUAL_LWT

Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

Percent Avail.Capacity

Percent Avail.Cap.Slave

0-100

CAP_A

CAP_A_S

Lag Start Delay Time

Load/Unload Factor

Load/Unload Factor-Slave

Lead SMZ Clear Commanded

Lag SMZ Clear Commanded

Lag Commanded Off?

hh:mm

snnn.n

Yes/No

LAGDELAY

SMZ

SMZSLAVE

LEADSMZC

LAG_SMZC

LAG_OFF

Dual Chill Lead CapLimit

Dual Chill Lag CapLimit

0-100

DCLDCAPL

DCLGCAPL

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS

UNIT VOLTAGE

V-Hz (3 Ph)

OVERLOAD

SETTING

PUMP OPTION

PUMP SIZE

208/230-60

380-60

4.0

2.0

1.6

2.4

1, 8

1.0 HP

460-60

575-60

208/230-60

380-60

5.4

2.7

2.2

3.3

6.6

3.3

2.6

4.0

8.8

4.4

3.5

5.3

14.0

7.0

5.6

8.5

2, 9

3, B

1.5 HP

2.0 HP

3.0 HP

5.0 HP

7.5 HP

460-60

575-60

208/230-60

380-60

460-60

575-60

208/230-60

380-60

460-60

575-60

208/230-60

380-60

460-60

575-60

208/230-60

380-60

460-60

575-60

4, C

5, 6, D, F

7, G

22.8

11.4

9.1

13.8

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

Optional BACnet Communications Wiring —

The following section is used to configure the UPC Open con-

troller which is used when the BACnet communications option

is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in the main

control box per unit components arrangement diagrams.

10's

1's

5 ⁴

TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The

user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is

unique on the BACnet* network. Perform the following proce-

dure to assign an address:

1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw ter-

minal connector from the controller's power terminals la-

beled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address

each time power is applied to it.

2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the con-

troller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens dig-

it of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones

digit.

As an example in Fig. B, if the controller’s address is 25,

point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on

the Ones (1's) switch to 5.

5 ⁴

Fig. B — Address Rotary Switches

BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC

Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address.

This Device Instance MUST be unique for the complete BAC-

net system in which the UPC Open controller is installed. The

Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by

adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number.

The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101,

but it can be changed using i-Vu^®Tools or BACView device.

By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device In-

stance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of

1610120.

BT485

TERMINATOR

BACNET

CONNECTION

(BAS PORT)

POWER LED

Tx1 LED

Rx1 LED

Tx2 LED

Rx2 LED

BACNET

BAUD RATE

DIP SWITCHES

EIA-485

JUMPERS

ADDRESS

ROTARY

SWITCHES

RUN LED

ERROR LED

Fig. A — UPC Open Controller

* Sponsored by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerat-

ing, and Air Conditioning Engineers).

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/

TP — Use the same baud rate and communication settings for

all controllers on the network segment. The UPC Open con-

troller is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this

protocol's communications.

If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull

the screw terminal connector from the controller's power termi-

nals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP

Switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it.

Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS

Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP

switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table A.

Fig. C — DIP Switches

Table A — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings

for MS/TP

Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a dai-

sy-chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are

22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance,

twisted, stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length

is 2000 ft.

Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on

a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions

due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E.

DS8

DS7

DS6

DS5

DS4

DS3

Off

Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set

to EIA-485 and 2W.

The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches

set for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP.

Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appro-

priate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600,

19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. D and Table B.

To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:

1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's

BAS Port.

Table B — Baud Selection Table

2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and

grounds.

3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s

screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.

NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network

segment.

4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC

Open controller's power terminals if they are not current-

ly connected.

5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a

module status report. To perform a module status report

using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold

the “FN” key then press the “.” Key.

BAUD RATE

9,600

DS2

Off

DS1

Off

19,200

38,400

76,800

WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/

TP NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates

using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications

at 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.

Fig. D — Network Wiring

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation

To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator

temperature rating specifications list two acceptable alterna-

tives. The Halar specification has a higher temperature rating

and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard specification,

and it is appropriate for use in applications where the user is

concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also less likely to

crack in extremely low temperatures.

on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector.

NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with

it.

To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products

i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.

MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommen-

dations are shown in Tables C and D. The wire jacket and UL

NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum

signal integrity.

Table C — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

SPECIFICATION

RECOMMMENDATION

Cable

Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable

22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)

Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.

Black/White

2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal

Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire

Conductor

Insulation

Color Code

Twist Lay

Shielding

SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D.

Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.

Jacket

DC Resistance

Capacitance

Characteristic Impedance

Weight

15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal

12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor

100 Ohms nominal

12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)

SmokeGard 167°F (75°C)

Halar -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C)

UL Temperature Rating

Voltage

Listing

300 Vac, power limited

UL: NEC CL2P, or better

LEGEND

AWG

CL2P

— American Wire Gage

— Class 2 Plenum Cable

— Direct Current

FEP

NEC

O.D.

— Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer

— National Electrical Code

— Outside Diameter

— Tinned Copper

— Underwriters Laboratories

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors

WIRING SPECIFICATIONS

Description

RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS

Connect Air

International

Contractors

Wire and Cable

Wire Type

Belden RMCORP

22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,

TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for

specifications.

24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,

TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide

for specifications.

W221P-22227

W241P-2000F

—

25160PV

CLP0520LC

MS/TP

Network (RS-485)

82841 25120-OR

21450

—

Rnet

4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated.

W184C-2099BLB 6302UE

CLP0442

LEGEND

— American Wire Gage

— Class 2 Plenum Cable

— Communications Plenum Rated

— Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer

— Tinned Copper

AWG

CL2P

CMP

FEP

LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROL-

LER — The user can use a BACview⁶handheld keypad dis-

play unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user inter-

face to an Open controller. These items let the user access the

controller network information. These are accessory items and

do not come with the UPC Open controller.

The BACview⁶unit connects to the local access port on the

UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must

be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local

access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will re-

quire an additional USB link cable for connection.

ber and CCN Bus number. The factory default settings for

CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.

If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are

required, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations

must be changed.

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-

dress and Bus number in the ComfortLink control. These con-

figurations can be changed using the scrolling marquee display

or accessory Navigator handheld device.

Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)

Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-

dress and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These con-

figurations can be changed using the accessory BACview⁶dis-

play.

See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instruc-

tions on connecting and using the BACview⁶device.

To order a BACview⁶Handheld (BV6H), consult Commer-

cial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.

CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S

PROPERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink

control must be set to the same CCN Address (Element) num-

Navigation: BACview→CCN

Home: Element Comm Stat

Element: 1

Bus: 0

Fig. F — BACview⁶Device Connection

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

If the UPC Open is used with the chiller application of

traffic based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the

more solid the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs

on UPC Open module.

REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY — The UPC

Open controller's 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a

minimum of 10,000 hours of data retention during power out-

ages.

Lead/Lag/Standby, all chillers and UPC Open's CCN element

numbers must be changed to a unique number in order to fol-

low CCN specifications. In this application, there can only be a

maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus.

For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC

Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/

Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician

must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger

on the CCN bus.

For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC

Open defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/

Lag/Standby application is used, then the Carrier technician

must change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broad-

caster on the CCN bus.

TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or

addressing the UPC Open controller, contact Carrier Technical

Support.

COMMUNICATION LEDS — The LEDs indicate if the

controller is communicating with the devices on the network.

See Tables E and F. The LEDs should reflect communication

IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open when

replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data will

be lost.

Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the

battery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's

polarity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open

controller.

NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the control-

ler is shown in Table G.

Refer to Appendix B for additional information on CCN

point name.

Table E — LED Status Indicators

LED

STATUS

Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on

the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition

that caused the fault returns to normal.

Power

Run

Error

Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication

RUN LED

ERROR LED

STATUS

2 flashes per second

5 flashes per second

7 flashes per second

Off

Normal

2 flashes, alternating with Run LED

3 flashes, then off

1 flash per second

Off

Five minute auto-restart delay after system error

Controller has just been formatted

Controller is alone on the network

Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted

Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running

Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running

Ten second recovery period after brownout

7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED

14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table G — Network Points List

CCN POINT READ/

DEFAULT

VALUE

BACNET

POINT DESCRIPTION

UNITS

RANGE

NAME

LMT_MA

RST_MA

DEM_LIM

WRITE

OBJECT ID

OBJECT NAME

4-20 ma Demand Signal

4-20 ma Reset Signal

Active Demand Limit

Active Setpoint

R/W

°F

AV:36

AV:33

AV:2

lmt_ma_1

rst_ma_1

dem_lim_1

sp_1

100

0 - 100

°F

AV:4

1 = Normal

2 = Alert

3 = Alarm

Alarm State

ALM

MSV:1

alm_msv_1

CCN Chiller

CCN Loadshed Signal

Circuit A Run Hours

Circuit A Starts

Circuit B Run Hours

CHIL_S_S

DL_STAT

HR_CIRA

CY_CIRA

HR_CIRB

CY_CIRB

CL_MAINT

SI_COIL

CL_CDOWN

A1UNLTME

TMP_RGTA

TMP_RGTB

K_A1_FBK

K_A1_RLY

HR_A1

R/W

Start

Start/Stop

BV:4

AV:37

AV:59

AV:65

AV:62

AV:68

BV:54

AV:50

AV:49

AV:73

AV:20

AV:28

BV:16

BV:13

AV:60

AV:66

BV:17

BV:14

AV:61

AV:67

BV:20

BV:18

AV:63

AV:69

BV:21

BV:19

AV:64

AV:70

chil_s_s_1

dl_stat_1

hr_cira_1

cy_cira_1

hr_cirb_1

cy_cirb_1

cl_maint_1

si_coil_1

cl_cdown_1

a1unltme_1

tmp_rgta_1

tmp_rgtb_1

k_a1_fbk_1

k_a1_rly_1

hr_a1_1

Circuit B Starts

Coil Cleaning Maint.Done

Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter

Coil Service Countdown

Comp A1 Unload Time

Compr Return Gas Temp

Compressor A1 Feedback

Compressor A1 Relay

Compressor A1 Run Hours

Compressor A1 Starts

Compressor A2 Feedback

Compressor A2 Relay

Compressor A2 Run Hours

Compressor A2 Starts

Compressor B1 Feedback

Compressor B1 Relay

Compressor B1 Run Hours

Compressor B1 Starts

Compressor B2 Feedback

Compressor B2 Relay

Compressor B2 Run Hours

Compressor B2 Starts

R/W

8760

Yes/No

0 - 65535

°F

CY_A1

cy_a1_1

K_A2_FBK

K_A2_RLY

HR_A2

k_a2_fbk_1

k_a2_rly_1

hr_a2_1

CY_A2

cy_a2_1

K_B1_FBK

K_B1_RLY

HR_B1

k_b1_fbk_1

k_b1_rly_1

hr_b1_1

CY_B1

cy_b1_1

K_B2_FBK

K_B2_RLY

HR_B2

k_b2_fbk_1

k_b2_rly_1

hr_b2_1

CY_B2

cy_b2_1

1 = Test

2 = Local Off

3 = CCN Off

4 = Clock Off

5 = Emergency Stop

6= Local On

Control Mode

CONTROL

MSV:2

stat_msv_1

7 = CCN On

8 = Clock On

9 = Heat Enabled

10 = Pump Delay

Control Point

Cooler Entering Fluid

Cooler Flow Switch

CTRL_PNT

COOL_EWT

COOLFLOW

MODE_16

COOL_LWT

LWT_SP

PMP1_FBK

PMP2_FBK

COOLPMP1

COOLPMP2

PMP_SLCT

PUMP_DLY

COOL_HTR

CRAMP

R/W

°F

44.0

-20 - 70

AV:5

AV:30

BV:11

BV:42

AV:31

AV:38

BV:9

BV:10

BV:7

BV:8

AV:40

AV:41

BV:24

AV:56

AV:53

ctrl_pnt_1

cool_ewt_1

coolflow_1

mode_16_1

cool_lwt_1

lwt_sp_1

pmp1_fbk_1

pmp2_fbk_1

coolpmp1_1

coolpmp2_1

pmp_slct_1

pump_dly_1

cool_htr_1

cramp_1

Cooler Freeze Protection

Cooler Leaving Fluid

Cooler LWT Setpoint

Cooler Pump 1 Interlock

Cooler Pump 2 Interlock

Cooler Pump Relay 1

Cooler Pump Relay 2

Cooler Pump Select

Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly

Cooler/Pump Heater

Cooling Ramp Loading

Cooling Setpoint 1

°F

min

°F

0 - 10

1.0

44.0

0.2 - 2.0

-20 - 70

CSP1

csp1_1

LEGEND

— Read

— Write

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

READ/

WRITE

DEFAULT

VALUE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

POINT DESCRIPTION

POINT NAME

UNITS

RANGE

Cooling Setpoint 2

CSM Controlling Chiller

Demand Level 1

Demand Level 2

Demand Level 3

Demand Limit Switch 1

Demand Limit Switch 2

Demand/Sound Limited

Discharge Gas Temp

Discharge Pressure

Dual Setpoint

CSP2

MODE_1

R/W

°F

44.0

-20 - 70

AV:54

BV:30

AV:75

AV:76

AV:77

BV:25

BV:26

BV:41

AV:15

AV:13

AV:23

BV:39

BV:29

BV:2999

csp2_1

mode_1_1

dmv_lvl_1_perct_1

dmv_lvl_2_perct_1

dmv_lvl_3_perct_1

dmd_sw1_1

dmd_sw2_1

mode_15_1

disgas_1

dp_a_1

dp_b_1

mode_13_1

dual_in_1

element_stat_1

DMD_SW1

DMD_SW2

MODE_15

DISGAS

DP_A

DP_B

MODE_13

DUAL_IN

°F

psig

Dual Setpoint Switch

Element Comm Status

Element Communications

Alarm

BV:58

comm_lost_alm_1

Emergency Stop

Entering Fluid Temp

EXV % Open

Fan 1 Relay

Fan 2 Relay

Head Setpoint

Heat Request

High SCT Circuit A

High SCT Circuit B

High Temperature Cooling

Ice Done

EMSTOP

EWT

EXV_A

EXV_B

FAN_1

R/W

Enabled

Enabled/Emstop

BV:6

AV:6

emstop_1

ewt_1

exv_a_1

exv_b_1

fan_1_1

°F

AV:18

AV:27

BV:22

BV:23

AV:29

BV:28

BV:47

BV:48

BV:44

BV:27

AV:55

FAN_2

HSP

fan_2_1

hsp_1

°F

HEAT_REQ

MODE_21

MODE_22

MODE_18

ICE_DONE

CSP3

heat_req_1

mode_21_1

mode_22_1

mode_18_1

ice_done_1

csp3_1

Ice Setpoint

°F

32.0

-20 - 32

1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

Lead/Lag Circuit Select

LEAD_TYP

R/W

AV:43

lead_typ_1

Lead/Lag Circuit Select

Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

Leadpump

Leaving Fluid Temp - Prime

Variable

LEAD_TYP

DUAL_LWT

LEADPUMP

MSV:6

AV:32

MSV:9

lead_typ_msv_1

dual_lwt_1

leadpump_msv_1

°F

LWT

AV:7

lwt_1

Loading Sequence Select

Local Schedule

Low Cooler Suction Temp A

Low Cooler Suction Temp B

Low Sound Active

SEQ_TYPE

R/W

AV:74

BV:1

BV:35

BV:36

BV:2

BV:51

BV:43

AV:57

AV:58

BV:45

BV:32

BV:49

BV:15

BV:38

AV:42

BV:3

seq_type_1

schedule_1

mode_7_1

mode_8_1

lsactive_1

mode_25_1

mode_17_1

hr_mach_1

cy_mach_1

mode_19_1

mode_3_1

mode_23_1

mlv_rly_1

mode_10_1

delay_1

MODE_7

MODE_8

LSACTIVE

MODE_25

MODE_17

HR_MACH

CY_MACH

MODE_19

MODE_3

MODE_23

MLV_RLY

MODE_10

DELAY

Low Sound Mode

Low Temperature Cooling

Machine Operating Hours

Machine Starts

Making ICE

Master/Slave Control

Minimum Comp. On Time

Minimum Load Valve Relay

Minimum OFF Time Active

Minutes Off Time

min

°F

0 - 15

Occupied

OCC

OAT

MODE

CAP_A

occ_1

oat_1

mode_1

capa_a_1

capb_a_1

Outside Air Temperature

Override Modes in Effect

Percent Available Cap.

AV:34

BV:5

AV:12

AV:22

CAPB_A

LEGEND

— Read

— Write

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

READ/

WRITE

DEFAULT

VALUE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

POINT DESCRIPTION

POINT NAME

UNITS

RANGE

Percent Total Capacity

Pump 1 Maintenance Done

Pump 1 Run Hours

Pump 1 Service Countdown

Pump 2 Maintenance Done

Pump 2 Run Hours

Pump 2 Service Countdown

Pump Changeover Hours

Pump Off Delay Time

Pump Service Interval

Ramp Load Limited

CAP_T

CAPA_T

CAPB_T

R/W

AV:3

AV:11

AV:21

BV:52

AV:71

AV:46

BV:53

AV:72

AV:47

AV:39

BV:50

AV:48

BV:33

AV:9

cap_t_1

capa_t_1

capb_t_1

P1_MAINT

HR_PUMP1

P1_CDOWN

P2_MAINT

HR_PUMP2

P2_CDOWN

PMP_DLTA

MODE_24

SI_PUMPS

MODE_5

STAGE

Yes/No

p1_maint_1

hr_pump1_1

p1_cdown_1

p2_maint_1

hr_pump2_1

p2_cdown_1

pmp_dlta_1

mode_24_1

si_pumps_1

mode_5_1

stage_1

500

10 - 2000

0 - 65535

8760

Requested Stage

Rotate Cooler Pumps Now

Saturated Condensing Tmp

Saturated Suction Temp

Slow Change Override

Space Temperature

ROT_PUMP

TMP_SCTA

TMP_SCTB

TMP_SSTA

TMP_SSTB

MODE_9

SPT

MODE_20

ST_MAINT

ST_CDOWN

SI_STRNR

SP_A

R/W

No/Yes

BV:12

AV:16

AV:25

AV:17

AV:26

BV:37

AV:35

BV:46

BV:55

AV:52

AV:51

AV:14

AV:24

AV:44

AV:45

rot_pump_1

tmp_scta_1

tmp_sctb_1

tmp_ssta_1

tmp_sstb_1

mode_9_1

spt_1

mode_20_1

st_maint_1

st_cdown_1

si_strnr_1

sp_a_1

°F

8760

-40.0 - 245

Yes/No

Storing ICE

Strainer Maint. Done

Strainer Srvc Countdown

Strainer Srvc Interval

Suction Pressure

Suction Superheat Temp

psig

°^F

8760

0 - 65535

SP_B

SH_A

SH_B

sp_b_1

sh_a_1

sh_b_1

System Cooling Demand

Level

AV:9006

cool_demand_level_1

System Demand Limiting

Temperature Reset

BV:57

BV:40

BV:34

dem_lmt_act_1

mode_14_1

mode_6_1

MODE_14

MODE_6

Timed Override In Effect

User Defined Analog 1

User Defined Analog 2

User Defined Analog 3

User Defined Analog 4

User Defined Analog 5

User Defined Binary 1

User Defined Binary 2

User Defined Binary 3

User Defined Binary 4

User Defined Binary 5

Var Head Press Output

WSM Controlling Chiller

R/W

sq m

AV:2901

AV:2902

AV:2903

AV:2904

AV:2905

BV:2911

BV:2912

BV:2913

BV:2914

BV:2915

AV:19

user_analog_1_1

user_analog_2_1

user_analog_3_1

user_analog_4_1

user_analog_5_1

user_binary_1_1

user_binary_2_1

user_binary_3_1

user_binary_4_1

user_binary_5_1

vhp_act_1

VHP_ACT

MODE_2

BV:31

mode_2_1

LEGEND

— Read

— Write

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS

30RAP Maintenance Interval Requirements

WEEKLY

Compressor

Cooler

Check oil level.

None.

Economizer

Controls

Starter

None.

Review Alarm/Alert History.

None.

Condenser

None.

MONTHLY

Compressor

Cooler

Check oil level.

None.

Economizer

Controls

Starter

None.

Inspect sight glass for moisture and refrigerant level.

None.

Condenser

None.

QUARTERLY

Economizer

Compressor

Cooler

Check oil level

None.

Check refrigerant charge. Check all connec-

tions for leaks.

Perform an Automated Controls test. Run all compressors

and ensure proper operation.

Controls

Condenser

None.

Starter

Ensure operation of units flow switch.

ANNUALLY

Check Oil Level. Obtain and test an oil

sample.

Check refrigerant charge. Check all connec-

tions for leaks. Check approach on unit to

determine if tubes need cleaning. Check for

temperature drop across filter drier to deter-

mine if filter needs replacement.

Compressor

Cooler

Economizer

Verify proper operation of EXVs and TXVs

Perform an Automated Controls test. Run all compressors

and ensure proper operation. Ensure operation of unit flow

switch.

Controls

Inspect all coils and clean. Check condenser

approach to determine if tubes need to be

cleaned.

Inspect all electrical connections and tighten as needed.

Measure current to each compressor and inspect contac-

tors.

Condenser

Starter

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Main-

tenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RAP Weekly Maintenance Log

Plant ___________________________

Machine Model No. ________________

CHECK ALARMS

/ FAULTS

OPERATOR

INITIALS

DATE

OIL LEVEL

REMARKS

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Main-

tenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RAP Monthly Maintenance Log

Month

Date

Operator

UNIT SECTION

Compressor

ACTION

UNIT

yes/no

ppm

ENTRY

Check Oil Level

Send Oil Sample Out for Analysis

Leak Test

Annually

Inspect and Clean Cooler

Inspect Cooler Heater

yes/no

amps

Every 3 - 5 Years

Cooler

Leak Test

yes/no

PSI

yes/no

ppm

Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI)

Inspect Water Pumps

Leak Test

Condenser

Controls

Starter

Inspect and Clean Condenser Coil

General Cleaning and Tightening Connections

Check Pressure Transducers

Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors

General Tightening & Cleaning Connections

Inspect All Contactors

Check Refrigerant Charge

Verify Operation Of EXVs And Record Position

Record System Super Heat

yes/no

0-100%

deg. F

Annually

System

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements

are not covered under warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RAP Seasonal Shutdown Log

Month

Date

Operator

UNIT SECTION

Cooler

ACTION

Isolate and Drain Cooler

Add Glycol for Freeze Protection

Do Not Disconnect Control Power

ENTRY

Controls

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements

are not covered under warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01

Printed in U.S.A.

Form 30RAP-2T

Pg 114

12-10

Replaces: 30RAP-1T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID CHILLER

(Remove and use for Job File)

I. Project Information

JOB NAME ______________________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS _______________________________________________________________________________

CITY ____________________________________________ STATE _______________ ZIP______________

INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ________________________________________________________________

SALES OFFICE ___________________________________________________________________________

START-UP PERFORMED BY ________________________________________________________________

Design Information

CAPACITY

CEAT

EWT

LWT

FLUID TYPE

FLOW RATE

P.D.

UNIT MODEL ______________________________ SERIAL ________________________________

II. Preliminary Equipment Check

IS THERE ANY PHYSICAL DAMAGE?

 YES  NO

DESCRIPTION ____________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

1. UNIT IS INSTALLED LEVEL AS PER THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

2. POWER SUPPLY AGREES WITH THE UNIT NAMEPLATE.

3. ELECTRICAL POWER WIRING IS INSTALLED PROPERLY.

4. UNIT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.

 YES  NO

5. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION HAS BEEN SIZED AND INSTALLED PROPERLY.  YES  NO

6. ALL TERMINALS ARE TIGHT.

 YES  NO

7. ALL PLUG ASSEMBLIES ARE TIGHT.

8. ALL CABLES AND THERMISTORS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED FOR CROSSED WIRES.

9. ALL THERMISTORS ARE FULLY INSERTED INTO WELLS.

Chilled Water System Check

1. ALL CHILLED WATER VALVES ARE OPEN.

 YES  NO

2. ALL PIPING IS CONNECTED PROPERLY.

3. ALL AIR HAS BEEN PURGED FROM THE SYSTEM.

4. CHILLED WATER PUMP IS OPERATING WITH THE CORRECT ROTATION.

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg CL-1 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. CHILLED WATER PUMP STARTER INTERLOCKED WITH CHILLER.

6. CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH IS OPERATIONAL.

 YES  NO

7. WATER LOOP VOLUME GREATER THAN MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS. (See Table 40).

8. PROPER LOOP FREEZE PROTECTION PROVIDED TO _____ °F (°C).

ANTIFREEZE TYPE _____________________ CONCENTRATION __________%.

IF OUTDOOR AMBIENT IS BELOW 32 F (0° C) THEN ITEMS 9-11 HAVE TO BE

COMPLETED TO PROVIDE COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION TO –20 F (–29 C). (REFER

TO WINTER SHUTDOWN FOR PROPER COOLER WINTERIZATION PROCEDURE.)

9. OUTDOOR PIPING WRAPPED WITH ELECTRIC HEATER TAPE,

INSULATED AND OPERATIONAL.

 YES  NO

10. COOLER HEATERS INSTALLED AND OPERATIONAL.

11. CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROLLED BY CHILLER.

 YES  NO

III. Unit Start-Up

1. COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL IS CORRECT.

 YES  NO

2. VERIFY COMPRESSOR MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE IS 7-10 FT-LB. (9.5-13.5 N-M).

3. LEAK CHECK UNIT. LOCATE, REPAIR AND REPORT ANY REFRIGERANT LEAKS.

4. VOLTAGE IS WITHIN UNIT NAMEPLATE RANGE.

5. CONTROL TRANSFORMER PRIMARY CONNECTION SET FOR PROPER VOLTAGE.

6. CONTROL TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE =

7. CHECK VOLTAGE IMBALANCE:

AVERAGE VOLTAGE =

A-B

A-C

B-C

(A-B + A-C + B-C)/3

MAXIMUM DEVIATION FROM AVERAGE VOLTAGE =

VOLTAGE IMBALANCE = ____________% (MAX. DEVIATION/AVERAGE VOLTAGE) X 100

VOLTAGE IMBALANCE LESS THAN 2%.

(DO NOT START CHILLER IF VOLTAGE IMBALANCE IS GREATER THAN 2%.

CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY FOR ASSISTANCE.)

 YES  NO

8. VERIFY COOLER FLOW RATE.

PRESSURE ENTERING COOLER

PRESSURE LEAVING COOLER

COOLER PRESSURE DROP

Psig X 2.31 ft./psi =

________ psig (kPa)

________ ft of water

________ m of water

kPa X 0.334 m/psi

COOLER FLOW RATE

________ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure

Drop Curves from

Installation Instructions)

Start and Operate Machine. Complete the Following:

1. COMPLETE COMPONENT TEST.

 YES  NO

2. CHECK REFRIGERANT AND OIL CHARGE.

3. RECORD COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT.

4. RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.

 YES  NO

5. RECORD OPERATING TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES.

6. PROVIDE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER’S PERSONNEL.

 YES  NO

Instruction Time ________ hours.

CL-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATING DATA:

RECORD THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FROM THE PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES MODES WHEN

MACHINE IS IN A STABLE OPERATING CONDITION:

PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE

CIRCUIT A

CIRCUIT B

DISCHARGE PRESSURE

DP.A

DP.B

SUCTION PRESSURE

SP.A

SP.B

SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP

RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE

LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE*

DISCHARGE LINE TEMPERATURE*

*Readings taken with a digital thermometer.

SCT.A

SST.A

RGT.A

SCT.B

SST.B

RGT.B

COOLER EWT

EWT

LWT

COOLER LWT

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE

CONTROL POINT

OAT

CTPT

CAP

PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY

LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID

DLWT

(Dual Chiller Control Only)

Compressor Running Current — All readings taken at full load.

COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT

COMPRESSOR A1

COMPRESSOR A2

COMPRESSOR B1

COMPRESSOR B2

CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT

FAN MOTOR 1

FAN MOTOR 2

FAN MOTOR 3

FAN MOTOR 4

COOLER PUMP MOTOR CURRENT

COOLER PUMP 1

COOLER PUMP 2

CL-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Record Software Versions

MODE — RUN STATUS

SUB-MODE

VERS

ITEM

DISPLAY

ITEM

EXPANSION

MBB

AUX1

EXV

EMM

MARQUEE

NAVIGATOR

CESR-131460- _ _-_ _

CESR-131333- _ _-_ _

CESR-131172- _ _-_ _

CESR-131174- _ _-_ _

CESR-131171- _ _-_ _

CESR-131227- _ _-_ _

(PRESS ENTER AND ESCAPE SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OBTAIN

SOFTWARE VERSIONS)

COMMENTS:

_________________________________________________________________________________________

SIGNATURES:

START-UP

CUSTOMER

TECHNICIAN _____________________________

REPRESENTATIVE _____________________________

DATE ___________________________________

DATE ________________________________________

CL-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

UNIT (Configuration Settings)

SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

UNIT CONFIGURATION

UNIT SIZE

DISPLAY

ENTRY

SIZE

SZA.1

SZA.2

SZA.3

SZA.4

SZB.1

SZB.2

SZB.3

SZB.4

SH.SP

FAN.S

EXV

XXX

COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE

COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE

COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE

COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE

COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE

SUPERHEAT SETPOINT

FAN STAGING SELECT

EXV MODULE INSTALLED

COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL?

MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME

UNIT

XX.X F

YES/NO

A1.TY

MAX.T

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘UNIT’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’.

PRESS ENTER KEY. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:

OPTIONS1 (Options Configuration)

SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

COOLER FLUID

DISPLAY

ENTRY

FLUD

MLV.S

D.G.EN

CSB.E

CPC

YES/NO

ENBL/DSBL

ON/OFF

YES/NO

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT

DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE

CSB BOARDS ENABLE

COOLER PUMP CONTROL

COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE

COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE

COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT

COOLER PUMP SELECT

PM1E

PM2E

PM.P.S

PM.SL

PM.DY

PM.DT

ROT.P

EMM

OPT1

COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY

PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS

ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW

EMM MODULE INSTALLED

CND HX TYP 0=RTPF 1=MCHX

EXV MOP SET POINT

XX MIN

XXXX HRS

YES/NO

0/1

CND.T

MOPS

APPR

CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT

CL-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

OPTIONS2 (Options Configuration)

SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CONTROL METHOD

DISPLAY

ENTRY

CTRL

LOAD

LLCS

LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT

LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT

HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT

MINUTES OFF TIME

LCWT

DELY

XX.X F

ICE.M

CLS.C

LS.MD

LS.ST

LS.ND

LS.LT

CTRL

CCNA

CCNB

ICE MODE ENABLE

ENBL/DSBL

OPT2

CLOSE CONTROL SELECT

LOW SOUND MODE SELECT

LOW SOUND START TIME

LOW SOUND END TIME

LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT

CONTROL METHOD

00:00

XXX %

CCN ADDRESS

XXX

CCN BUS NUMBER

XXX

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

CCN (CCN Network Configuration)

SUB-MODE

CCN

ITEM

CCNA

CCNB

BAUD

ITEM EXPANSION

CCN ADDRESS

DISPLAY

XXX

ENTRY

CCN BUS NUMBER

CCN BAUD RATE

XXX

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.A’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

HP.A (Head Pressure Cmp. Delta Configuration)

SUB-MODE

HP.A

ITEM

A1.DT

A2.DT

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

ENTRY

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1

SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.A’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.B’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

HP.B (Head Pressure Cmp. Delta Configuration)

SUB-MODE

HP.B

ITEM

B1.DT

B2.DT

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

ENTRY

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1

SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2

CL-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.B’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.A’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

EXV.A (Circuit A EXV Configuration)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

STR.A

MIN.A

RNG.A

SPD.A

POF.A

MIN.A

MAX.A

OVR.A

TYP.A

H.SCT

X.PCT

X.PER

A.PCT

M.PCT

S.PCT

DELY

ITEM EXPANSION

EXV CIRC.A START POS

EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION

EXVA STEPS IN RANGE

EXVA STEPS PER SECOND

EXVA FAIL POSITION IN %

EXVA MINIMUM STEPS

DISPLAY

XXX

ENTRY

XXX

XXXXX

XXX

XXXXX

XXX

EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS

EXVA OVERRUN STEPS

EXVA STEPPER TYPE

EXV.A

0,1

HIGH SCT THRESHOLD

OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP

MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL

PRE-OPEN EXV - FAN ADDING

PRE-CLOSE EXV - FAN SUB

PRE-CLOSE EXV - LAG SHUT

LAG START DELAY

XXX

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.A’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.B’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

EXV.B (Circuit B EXV Configuration)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

STR.B

MIN.B

RNG.B

SPD.B

POF.B

MIN.B

MAX.B

OVR.AB

TYP.B

ITEM EXPANSION

EXV CIRC.B START POS

EXV CIRC.B MIN POSITION

EXVB STEPS IN RANGE

EXVB STEPS PER SECOND

EXVB FAIL POSITION IN %

EXVB MINIMUM STEPS

EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS

EXVB OVERRUN STEPS

EXVB STEPPER TYPE

DISPLAY

XXX

ENTRY

XXX

XXXXX

XXX

EXV.B

XXXXX

XXX

0,1

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.B’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

MM (Motormaster Configuration Settings)

SUB-MODE

ITEM

MMR.S

P.GAN

I.GAN

D.GAN

MIN.S

ITEM EXPANSION

DISPLAY

YES/NO

ENTRY

MOTORMASTER SELECT

HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN

HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN

HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN

MINIMUM FAN SPEED

XX.X

CL-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

RSET (Reset Configuration Settings)

SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

RESET COOL TEMP

DISPLAY

ENTRY

RSET

CRST

MA.DG

RM.NO

RM.F

COOLING RESET TYPE

XX.X °F

XXX.X °F

XX.X °F

XXX.X °F

XX.X °F

4-20 - DEGREES RESET

REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP

REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP

REMOTE - DEGREES RESET

RETURN - NO RESET TEMP

RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP

RETURN - DEGREES RESET

DEMAND LIMIT SELECT

DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA

LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER

LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA

MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE

MASTER/SLAVE SELECT

SLAVE ADDRESS

RM.DG

RT.NO

RT.F

RT.DG

DMDC

DM20

SHNM

SHDL

SHTM

DLS1

DLS2

LLEN

MSSL

SLVA

XXX %

XXX

XXX %

XXX

XXX %

ENBL/DSBL

SLVE/MAST

XXX

LLBL

LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LAG START DELAY

LLBD

LLDY

XXX

PARA

PARALLEL CONFIGURATION

YES/NO

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘SLCT’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:

SLCT (Setpoint and Ramp Load Configuration)

SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

RAMP LOAD SELECT

DISPLAY

ENTRY

SLCT

CLSP

RL.S

ENBL/DSBL

X.X

CRMP

SCHD

Z.GN

COOLING RAMP LOADING

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DEADBAND MULTIPLIER

X.X

CL-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY SEVERAL TIMES TO GET TO THE MODE LEVEL (BLANK DISPLAY). USE THE

ARROW KEYS TO SCROLL TO THE SET POINT LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY SETPOINTS.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:

SETPOINT

SUBMODE

ITEM

ITEM EXPANSION

COOLING SETPOINTS

COOLING SETPOINT 1

COOLING SETPOINT 2

ICE SETPOINT

DISPLAY

ENTRY

COOL

CSP.1

CSP.2

CSP.3

XXX.X °F

HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS

HEAD SET POINT

H.DP

F.ON

XXX.X °F

XX.X °F

FAN ON SET POINT

HEAD

FRZ

F.OFF

B.OFF

F.DLT

FAN OFF SET POINT

BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP

FAN STAGE DELTA

XX.X °F

BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT

BRINE FREEZE POINT

BR.FZ

XXX.X °F

CL-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

COMPONENT TEST

USE ESCAPE/ARROW KEYS TO ILLUMINATE CONFIGURATION LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘DISP’.

PRESS ENTER AGAIN TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’ FOLLOWED BY ‘OFF’. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY AT

‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ DISPLAY FLASHES. ‘PASS’ AND ‘WORD’ WILL FLASH IF PASSWORD

NEEDS TO BE ENTERED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY PASSWORD FIELD AND USE THE ENTER KEY FOR

EACH OF THE FOUR PASSWORD DIGITS. USE ARROW KEYS IF PASSWORD IS OTHER THAN STANDARD.

AT FLASHING ‘OFF’ DISPLAY, PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘ON’ AND PRESS ENTER. ALL LED

SEGMENTS AND MODE LEDS WILL LIGHT UP. PRESS ESCAPE TO STOP THE TEST. PRESS ESCAPE TO

RETURN TO THE ‘DISP’ DISPLAY. PRESS THE ESCAPE KEY AGAIN AND USE THE ARROW KEYS TO ILLU-

MINATE THE SERVICE TEST LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY

AT ‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ FLASHES. PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY AND ENTER TO ENABLE

THE MANUAL MODE. PRESS ESCAPE AND DISPLAY NOW SAYS ‘TEST’ ‘ON’. REFER TO THE TABLE

BELOW.

Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

Completed

(Yes/No)

SUB-MODE

TEST

ITEM DISPLAY

COMMENT

EXPANSION

ON/OFF

SERVICE TEST MODE

To Enable Service Test Mode,

move Enable/Off/Remote

Contact switch to OFF. Change

TEST to ON. Move switch to

ENABLE.

ENTER

OUTPUTS AND PUMPS

FAN 1 RELAY

ENTER

FAN1

FAN2

FAN3

FAN4

FAN5

FAN6

V.HPA

ON/OFF

XXX%

Condenser fan contactor 1

Condenser fan contactor 2

Condenser fan contactor 3

Condenser fan contactor 4

Condenser fan contactor 5

Condenser fan contactor 6

FAN 2 RELAY

FAN 3 RELAY

FAN 4 RELAY

FAN 5 RELAY

FAN 6 RELAY

VAR HEAD PRESS %

OUTS

VAR HEAD PRESS %

V.HPB

CLP.1

CLP.2

XXX%

ON/OFF

COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY

COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY

COOLER/PUMP HEATER

REMOTE ALARM RELAY

CL.HT ON/OFF

RMT.A ON/OFF

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

ENTER

CC.A1 ON/OFF

UL.TM

0 to 15

COMP A1 UnLOAD TIME

COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

CC.A2 ON/OFF

CC.A3 ON/OFF

CC.A4 ON/OFF

CMPA

MLV

ON/OFF

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST

COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

ENTER

CC.B1 ON/OFF

CC.B2 ON/OFF

CC.B3 ON/OFF

CC.B4 ON/OFF

See Note

COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

CMPB

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg CL-10 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Billy Goat Lawn Mower CR550HCV User Manual
Black Decker Iron BDCMTS User Manual
Black Decker Vacuum Cleaner 90521333 User Manual
Boss Audio Systems Stereo Amplifier CH550 User Manual
Brother Printer 5140 User Manual
Cannon Scanner MS 300 User Manual
Canon Fax Machine FAX L800 User Manual
Casio Watch MA0804 EC User Manual
Cavalry Storage Washer Dryer CAXR SERIES User Manual
Chevrolet Automobile 50061011 User Manual